Ford 2015 Transit Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2015-Ford-Transit-Owners-Manual-815548 ford-2015-ford-transit-owners-manual-815548 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 467 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

October 2014
Third Printing
Owner’s Manual
Transit
Litho in U.S.A.
fordowner.com ford.ca
2015 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual
2015 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual
FK3J 19A321 AB
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2014
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 03/2014 20140915160737
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65.............................10
Perchlorate........................................................10
Ford Credit.........................................................10
Replacement Parts
Recommendation......................................10
Special Notices.................................................11
Mobile Communications
Equipment......................................................11
Export Unique Options...................................11
Child Safety
General Information.......................................13
Installing Child Seats.....................................14
Booster Seats..................................................22
Child Seat Positioning..................................24
Child Safety Locks..........................................25
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation..................................26
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................29
Safety Belt Minder.........................................30
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................31
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation...................................32
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................33
Side Airbags.....................................................39
Safety Canopy............................................40
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
Airbag Disposal...............................................42
Keys and Remote Controls
Principle of Operation..................................43
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................43
Remote Control..............................................43
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................45
MyKey
Principle of Operation..................................46
Creating a MyKey............................................47
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................48
Checking MyKey System Status..............49
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................50
MyKey Troubleshooting................................51
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................53
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System........................58
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................59
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................60
Audio Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display................................60
Audio Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display..................................61
Voice Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display..................................61
Voice Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display..................................61
Cruise Control..................................................62
Information Display Control.......................62
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................63
Autowipers.......................................................63
Windshield Washers.....................................64
1
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Table of Contents
Lighting
General Information......................................65
Lighting Control..............................................65
Autolamps........................................................66
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................67
Daytime Running Lamps.............................67
Direction Indicators.......................................68
Interior Lamps.................................................68
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows.............................................69
Exterior Mirrors................................................70
Interior Mirror...................................................70
Rear Quarter Windows..................................71
Instrument Cluster
Gauges................................................................72
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................74
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............76
Information Displays
General Information......................................78
Trip Computer..................................................81
Personalized Settings...................................82
Information Messages.................................83
Climate Control
Principle of Operation..................................88
Air Vents............................................................88
Manual Climate Control..............................89
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................90
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............91
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................92
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position...................93
Head Restraints..............................................93
Manual Seats..................................................94
Power Seats.....................................................96
Rear Seats.........................................................97
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................101
Cigar Lighter...................................................102
Storage Compartments
Cup Holders....................................................103
Overhead Console.......................................103
Bottle Holder..................................................103
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................104
Ignition Switch..............................................104
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................104
Starting a Diesel Engine............................105
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................106
Switching Off the Engine...........................107
Engine Block Heater....................................107
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions......................................109
Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................110
Fuel Quality - Diesel......................................111
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................113
Running Out of Fuel......................................113
Catalytic Converter.......................................114
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System...........................................................115
Refueling...........................................................118
Fuel Consumption.......................................120
Emission Control System...........................122
Transmission
Automatic Transmission............................132
Brakes
General Information....................................136
2
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Table of Contents
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................136
Parking Brake..................................................137
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................138
Using Traction Control................................138
Stability Control
Principle of Operation................................140
Using Stability Control.................................141
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation.................................142
Parking Aid......................................................142
Rear View Camera........................................143
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation................................146
Using Cruise Control...................................146
Driving Aids
Speed Limiter................................................148
Driver Alert......................................................148
Lane Keeping System.................................149
Load Carrying
Load Retaining Fixtures..............................152
Load Limit........................................................152
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................160
Trailer Sway Control.....................................161
Recommended Towing Weights.............161
Essential Towing Checks...........................163
Transporting the Vehicle...........................169
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......170
Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................172
Reduced Engine Performance.................172
Economical Driving.......................................172
Cold Weather Precautions.........................173
Driving Through Water................................173
Floor Mats........................................................173
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................175
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................176
Fuel Shutoff....................................................176
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................177
Post-Crash Alert System...........................179
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need...............180
In California (U.S. Only)..............................181
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................182
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................182
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................183
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................184
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only).............................................................184
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................185
Fuses
Fuse Box Locations.....................................186
Fuse Specification Chart...........................187
Changing a Fuse...........................................198
Maintenance
General Information..................................200
Opening and Closing the Hood.............200
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................201
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L...................202
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel.............................................203
3
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Table of Contents
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L.........................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L..........................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel...........................................................204
Engine Oil Check..........................................204
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil
Filter.............................................................205
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................206
Engine Coolant Check...............................206
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................209
Brake Fluid Check.........................................210
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................210
Washer Fluid Check.....................................210
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........210
Fuel Filter - Gasoline....................................212
Changing the 12V Battery..........................213
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................215
Changing the Wiper Blades......................215
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................215
Removing a Headlamp...............................216
Changing a Bulb............................................217
Bulb Specification Chart............................221
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.5L.....223
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.7L......224
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel................................225
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Products........................................227
Cleaning the Exterior...................................227
Waxing.............................................................228
Cleaning the Engine....................................228
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................229
Cleaning the Interior...................................229
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................229
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............230
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................230
Vehicle Storage..............................................231
Wheels and Tires
General Information...................................233
Tire Care..........................................................234
Using Winter Tires.......................................250
Using Snow Chains......................................251
Tire Pressure Monitoring System............251
Changing a Road Wheel...........................256
Lug Nuts..........................................................264
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications - 3.5L....................265
Engine Specifications - 3.7L....................265
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel.............................................266
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L..............................267
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L..............................268
Motorcraft Parts - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel...........................................................269
Vehicle Identification Number................270
Vehicle Certification Label.......................270
Transmission Code Designation..............271
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L......271
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.....274
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel................................278
Audio System
General Information...................................282
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM......283
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................286
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC............................................................288
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio............................290
Digital Radio..................................................292
Satellite Radio..............................................294
Audio Input Jack...........................................297
USB Port..........................................................297
Media Hub......................................................298
4
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Table of Contents
Audio Troubleshooting..............................299
SYNC
General Information..................................300
Using Voice Recognition...........................302
Using SYNC With Your Phone...........304
SYNC Applications and Services.......318
Using SYNC With Your Media
Player...........................................................329
SYNC Troubleshooting.........................339
MyFord Touch
General Information...................................348
Settings...........................................................356
Entertainment..............................................369
Phone..............................................................388
Information....................................................395
Navigation......................................................405
Accessories
Accessories.....................................................414
Auxiliary Switches........................................415
Appendices
End User License Agreement..................416
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................438
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......440
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........443
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................445
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........448
5
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Table of Contents
6
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about it,
the greater the safety and pleasure you
will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is
always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.
Note: Either Ford Motor Company or an
authorized Ford dealer may have originally
sold this incomplete vehicle to a vehicle
modifier who upfitted it. As a result, some
of the options and features on this vehicle
may differ from what we describe in this
manual.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
7
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Introduction
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
8
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Introduction
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
A large number of electronic components
of your vehicle contain data storage
modules temporarily or permanently
storing technical data about the condition
of the vehicle, events and errors.
In general, this technical information
documents the condition of parts,
modules, systems or the environment:
Operating conditions of system
components (e.g. filling levels).
Status messages of the vehicle and its
individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/rotational speed,
deceleration, lateral acceleration).
Malfunction and defects in important
system components (e.g. lighting and
brake system).
Vehicle reactions in particular driving
situations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,
activation of the stability regulation
system).
Environmental conditions (e.g.
temperature).
These data are exclusively technical and
help identification and correction of errors
as well as optimisation of vehicle
functions. Motion profiles indicating
travelled routes cannot be created with
these data.
9
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Introduction
If services are used (e.g. repair works,
service processes, warranty cases, quality
assurance), employees of the service
network (including manufacturers) are
able to read out this technical information
from the event and error data storage
modules using special diagnostic devices.
If required, you will receive further
information. After an error has been
corrected, these data are deleted from the
error storage module or they are constantly
overwritten.
When using the vehicle, situations may
occur in which these technical data related
to other information (accident report,
damages on the vehicle, witness
statements etc.) may be associated with
a specific person - possibly, with the
assistance of an expert.
Additional functions contractually agreed
upon with the client (e.g. vehicle location
in emergency cases) allow the
transmission of particular vehicle data
from the vehicle.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. For more information
visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
10
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Introduction
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owners Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
If converting or modifying your vehicle from
production specification, refer to the Body
and Equipment Mounting Manual at
www.etis.ford.com/fordservice.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owners Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
11
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Introduction
are unique to your vehicle. This Owners
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owners
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
12
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Introduction
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
WARNINGS
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, locate your local
St. John Ambulance office by searching for
St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
13
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
14
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be correctly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be correctly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
Insert the belt tongue into the correct
buckle until you hear a distinct click
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue
is securely fastened in the buckle.
Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. Your vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
15
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a distinct click and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
16
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
correct snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for correct installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is correctly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be correctly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used
to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the correct top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.
17
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
E184881
E178551
E178552
E178553
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
E177639
18
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back above the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to correctly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in your vehicle.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is correctly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a correct installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored correctly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a correct
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E184881
19
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
E178551
E178552
E178553
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Front Passenger Seating Position
1. Adjust the front passenger seat fully
forward.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat, under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts.
20
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
E178096
3. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
5. Adjust the front passenger seat full
rearward.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.
Rear Seats
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat, under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts.
E177640
21
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
Backless booster seats
22
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
23
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
WARNINGS
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
24
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by XCombined
weight of
child and
child
restraint
seat
Restraint
type Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XXUp to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XOver 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXXUp to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XXOver 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
93).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING
You cannot open the rear side door
from inside if you have put the child
safety lock on.
E176718
A child safety lock is on the rear side door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn it counterclockwise to switch the child
lock on and clockwise to switch it off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn it clockwise to switch the child lock
on and counterclockwise to switch it off.
25
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with the seat
backrest upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash
which may result in serious injury or death.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
Lap and shoulder safety belts.
Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
Safety belt warning light and chime.
Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
26
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Safety Belts
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, side crashes and
rollovers, the safety belt pretensioners may
be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the safety belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your seat
back upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E170730
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
27
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Safety Belts
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.
Safety belt and retractor assemblies
must be replaced if the safety belt
assembly automatic locking retractor
feature, or any other safety belt function
is not operating correctly when checked
by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace
the safety belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in a crash.
All safety belts in your vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode, and the front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the safety belt retract
slightly and pull webbing out again in a
slow and controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The safety belt
will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
correctly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 13).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire safety belt
is pulled out.
Allow the safety belt to retract. As the
safety belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now
in the automatic locking mode.
28
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Safety Belts
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and return the safety belt to
the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Only use extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at
the end of the webbing on the label or the
retractor behind the trim. Only use an
extension if the safety belt is too short for
you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the safety belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt correctly
could reduce its effectiveness and increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
E165022
1
2
2
3
1. Press the button.
2. Slide the height adjuster up or down.
3. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
29
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Safety Belts
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder®
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the safety belt
warning light when the driver seat is
occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not turn on.The driver safety belt is buckled before the
ignition is switched on or less than two
minutes have elapsed since the ignition was
switched on.
The Belt-Minder feature is turned on - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the driver safety belt is
buckled.
The driver safety belt is not buckled when
the vehicle has reached at least 6 mph (9.7
km/h) and two minutes have elapsed since
the ignition was switched on.
The Belt-Minder feature is turned on - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the driver safety belt is
buckled.
The driver safety belt becomes unbuckled
for about one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than two minutes have elapsed since
the ignition was switched on.
30
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Safety Belts
Switching the Belt-Minder on and off
WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch it off, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving a crash. We
recommend you leave the system
switched on. To reduce the risk of injury,
do not switch the system on or off while
driving your vehicle.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
The system can be switched on and off by
carrying out the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
The parking brake is set.
The transmission selector lever is in
position park (P).
The ignition is switched off.
The driver safety belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
Step 3 is started, the procedure must
be completed within 30 seconds.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the driver safety
belt three times at a moderate speed,
ending in the unbuckled state. After
Step 3, the safety belt warning light will
illuminate.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
illuminated, buckle then unbuckle the
driver safety belt. After Step 4, the
safety belt warning light will flash for
confirmation.
This will disable the feature if it is
currently enabled.
This will enable the feature if it is
currently disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 227).
31
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Safety Belts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. Do not touch
them after inflation as this may result
in serious injury.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
32
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
Driver and passenger airbag modules.
Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
41).
Passenger Airbag On and Off
Switch (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
The front passenger airbag is not
designed to offer protection to an
occupant in the center seating
position.
An airbag ON and OFF switch may
be installed in this vehicle. Before
driving, always look at the face of the
switch to be sure the switch is in the proper
position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure to put
the switch in a proper position can increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a crash.
E181532
High-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has indicators that will illuminate,
indicating that the front passenger frontal
airbag is either on or off. The indicator lamp
is located on the radio.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON lamps will illuminate for a short
period of time when the ignition is first
turned on to confirm it is functional.
33
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Switch position
DisabledOFF: LitOff
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitOn
ON: Lit
E170613
Low-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has an indicator that will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is off. The
indicator lamp is located by the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for
a short period of time when the ignition is
first turned on to confirm it is functional.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNINGS
If the light fails to illuminate when
the passenger airbag switch is off
and the ignition is on, have the
passenger airbag switch serviced at your
authorized dealer immediately.
In order to avoid inadvertent
activation of the switch, always
remove the ignition key from the
passenger airbag on and off switch.
WARNINGS
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces
a high risk of serious or fatal injuries
from a deploying passenger airbag.
Rear facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seats, unless the
passenger airbag is turned off.
E181523
34
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E181522
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch
to OFF and hold in OFF while removing
the key.
2. When the ignition is turned on, the pass
airbag off light illuminates briefly,
momentarily shuts off and then turns
back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNINGS
The safety belts for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically
designed to function together with the
airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn off your airbag, you not only lose
the protection of the airbag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt
system, which was designed to work with
the airbag. If you are not a passenger who
meets the requirements stated in the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria turning off the airbag
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash.
WARNINGS
If your vehicle has rear seats, always
transport children who are 12 years
and under in the rear seat. Always
use safety belts and child restraints
correctly. Do not place a child in a rear
facing infant seat in the front seat unless
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag on
and off switch and the passenger airbag is
turned off. This is because the back of the
infant seat is too close to the inflating
airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the
infant when the airbag inflates is
substantial.
If the pass airbag off light is
illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is on and the ignition
is on, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced at your authorized dealer
immediately.
The passenger airbag remains off until you
turn it back on.
E181521
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the
switch to ON.
2. The pass airbag off light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is turned
to on. This indicates that the passenger
airbag is operational.
35
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The passenger side airbag should always
be on (the pass airbag off light should not
be illuminated) unless the passenger
meets the requirements stated either in
Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration or Transport
Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers
are much safer with an airbag than
without. To do their job and reduce the risk
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
pose a potentially deadly risk in some
situations, particularly when a front seat
passenger is not using the safety belt
correctly. The most effective way to reduce
the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries
without reducing the overall safety of your
vehicle is to make sure all passengers are
correctly restrained in the vehicle,
especially in the front seat. This provides
the protection of safety belts and permits
the airbags to provide the additional
protection they were designed to provide.
If you choose to deactivate your airbag,
you are losing the very significant risk
reducing benefits of the airbag and you are
also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in
modern vehicles are designed to work as
a safety system with the airbags.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada)
WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger.
These particular belts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt
webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is turned off, this
energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move
forward enough to incur a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk
is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for any
person who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
the vehicle has no rear seat;
the vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
the infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
36
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
the vehicle has no rear seat;
although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the
rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of the
vehicle; or
the child has a medical condition
which, according to the child's
physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
causes the passenger airbag to pose a
special risk for the passenger;
makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria
(Canada Only)
WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger.
These particular belts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt
webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is turned off, this
energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move
forward enough to incur a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk
is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for any
person who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
my vehicle has no rear seat;
the rear seat in my vehicle cannot
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat;
the infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that
the driver can monitor the infant's
condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or
under must ride in the front seat because:
37
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
my vehicle has no rear seat;
although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
children age 12 and under have no
option but to sometimes ride in the
front seat because rear seat space is
insufficient;
the child has a medical condition that,
according to the child's physician,
makes it necessary for the child to ride
in the front seat so that the driver can
monitor the child's condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
medical condition that, according to his or
her physician:
poses a special risk for the passenger
if the airbag deploys; and
makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag deployment greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and experiencing a crash
without the protection offered by the
airbag
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration recommends a
minimum distance of at least 10
inches (25 centimeters) between an
occupants chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
38
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should not incur
risk of serious injury from the airbags.
SIDE AIRBAGS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found
on your vehicle.
Side airbags located inside the
seatback of the driver and front
passenger seats.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 41).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
39
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
SAFETY CANOPY (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the side rail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The safety canopy could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the safety canopy, its fuses,
the pillar trims, or the headliner on a
vehicle with a safety canopy as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
safety canopy are provided. Failure to wear
your safety belt correctly could seriously
increase the risk of personal injury or death.
To reduce risk of personal injury, do
not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the safety
canopy.
If a safety canopy deploys it will not
function again. The safety canopy,
including the pillar trims and
headliner, must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the safety
canopy is not replaced, the unrepaired area
will increase the risk of personal injury in a
crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail behind the
headliner and above each row of seats. In
certain sideways crashes or rollover events,
the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied.
The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate
between the side window area and
occupants to further enhance protection
provided in side impact crashes and
rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
Safety canopy airbags located above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow safety canopy
deployment
The crash sensors and monitoring
system have a readiness indicator. See
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 41).
40
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The safety canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the safety
canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of personal
injury related to the deployment of a safety
canopy.
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle. Adding equipment to the
front of the vehicle, including the
frame, bumper, front body structure or
recovery hook may affect the performance
of the airbag system, increasing the risk of
personal injury.
The vehicle has a collection of crash
sensors which provide information to the
supplemental restraint system control
module. The system will deploy the front
safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, seat mounted side
airbags or safety canopy based on the type
of crash, for example frontal impact or side
impact. The supplemental restraint system
control module will deploy the appropriate
safety devices.
The supplemental restraint system control
module also monitors the readiness of the
above safety devices plus the crash
sensors. The readiness of the
supplemental restraint system is indicated
by a warning lamp in the instrument cluster
or by a backup tone if the warning lamp is
not working. Routine maintenance of the
airbags is not required.
If a fault is present in the supplemental
restraint system it is indicated by one or
more of the following:
The warning lamp will not
illuminate when you switch the
ignition on.
The warning lamp will either flash or
stay illuminated.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the fault, the warning lamp or
both are repaired.
If the above occurs, even intermittently,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless repaired, the
system may not operate correctly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbags are designed to deploy when the
vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration
sufficient to cause the supplemental
restraint system control module to deploy
a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not deploy for all front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
there is a fault with the system. The
supplemental restraint system control
module determines crash conditions,
severity and safety belt usage to deploy
the appropriate safety devices.
41
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The design of the front airbags is to
deploy only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes, for example not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, unless the
crash causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to deploy only in
frontal and near-frontal crashes, and
may also deploy if a safety canopy
deploys.
The design of the side airbags is to
deploy only in certain side impact
crashes. Side airbags may deploy in
other types of crashes if your vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
The design of the safety canopy is to
deploy only in certain side impact
crashes or rollover events. The safety
canopy may deploy in other types of
crashes if your vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation, or the likelihood of a
rollover event.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
42
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
remotely lock or unlock the vehicle
doors
unlock the doors without actively using
a key or remote control (intelligent
access only)
remotely open the power liftgate (if
equipped)
remotely start or stop the engine (if
equipped)
arm and disarm the anti-theft system
activate the panic alarm.
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
weather conditions
nearby radio towers
structures around the vehicle
other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other short
distance radio transmissions, for example
amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems. If the frequencies are
jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Key head Transmitter
(If Equipped)
E177585
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
43
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E138615
Note: Your vehicles keys came with a
security label that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the label
in a safe place for future reference.
Programming a New Remote
Control
To program an additional remote control
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
58).
Replacing the Battery
The remote control uses one coin type
three volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
Integrated Key head Transmitter
E138619
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Remove the old battery.
E138620
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
instructions inside the transmitter for
the correct orientation of the battery.
Press the battery down to make sure
it is fully in the housing.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the
transmitter.
Car Finder
Press the lock button on the key twice
within three seconds. The horn sounds and
the direction indicators will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
44
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: If locking was not successful or if any
door is open, or if the hood is open on
vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote
start, the horn will sound and the direction
indicators will not flash.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The alarm will only operate when the
ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to turn on the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to turn off.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Remote
Control (page 43).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.
45
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys can
be activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are
referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. They can be used to:
Create a MyKey.
Program configurable MyKey settings.
Clear all MyKey features.
When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information by using
the information display to determine:
How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
The total distance your vehicle traveled
with a MyKey.
Note: Switch the ignition on to use the
system.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
Safety belt minder. You cannot disable
this feature. The audio system will
mute when the driver's safety belt is
not fastened.
Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning
activates earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid
and Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS) with cross traffic alert.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the engine. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key.
A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off AdvanceTrac or the do not disturb
feature (if your vehicle is equipped with
these features).
46
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyKey (If Equipped)
CREATING A MYKEY
You can program a MyKey using the
information display control on the steering
wheel. See Information Displays (page
78).
Insert the key you want to program into the
ignition and switch the ignition on.
Press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until you see a message
informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at your vehicle's next start.
Create MyKey
Make sure you label the key so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings for the key(s).
Refer to the following Programming/Changing Configur-
able Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
Use the information display to access the configurable MyKey settings, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll to a configurable
feature.
MyKey
Press the OK or right arrow button to make a selection.
Choose your applicable setting.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle
as you created the MyKey. Once you switch the ignition off you will need an admin key to
change or clear your MyKey settings.
47
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyKey (If Equipped)
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 78).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
48
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyKey (If Equipped)
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 78).
To find information on a programed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKey. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programed.
{0} Admin Keys
49
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyKey (If Equipped)
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
Vehicles With Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start
Systems
When using a Ford-approved aftermarket
remote start system, the vehicle recognizes
the remote start system as an additional
admin key. It is the vehicles default setting.
You can also program the remote start as
a MyKey. As a result, the MyKey system
status menu display includes the remote
start system as an additional key in the
total count of programed keys. See
Checking MyKey System Status (page
49).
When you start your vehicle with a
Ford-approved aftermarket remote start
system, the system stalls the engine after
you open the door or shift your vehicle into
gear. This is intentional. When you restart
your vehicle, it reads the Key or intelligent
Key fob status instead of the remote start
system status.
As an added precaution, owners of vehicles
fitted with traditional keys may want to
program the remote start system as a
MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote
start fob. That way, when the MyKey driver
starts the vehicle with the remote start
system, the MyKey restrictions remain
active.
With a Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start system, it is possible to program all
keys as MyKeys unintentionally. If this
happens, then the remote start fob is the
admin key. If you want to have only one
key as a MyKey, or do not want to have any
MyKeys, then you need to use your remote
start to clear all MyKeys. In that case,
follow these steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Start your vehicle using your remote
start fob.
3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 48).
Follow Steps 1-3.
After clearing your MyKeys, you can create
a new MyKey. See Creating a MyKey
(page 47).
Note: For vehicles with Intelligent Access
keys (push-button start), you cannot
program the remote start system as a
MyKey. Always treat the remote start fob
as you would any other admin key.
Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start
Systems
MyKey is not compatible with
non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a
remote start system, see an authorized
dealer for a Ford-approved remote start
system.
The following information may help if you
choose to install a non-Ford-approved
remote start system. The actions provided
below do not make MyKey compatible with
non-Ford-approved remote start systems,
but may help you retain some MyKey
functions.
When using a non-Ford-approved remote
start system, the vehicle may recognize
the remote start system as an additional
admin key with its associated privileges. If
you restart the engine by inserting a key
into the ignition cylinder and recycling the
ignition completely, then you may retain
some MyKey functions. This action forces
your vehicle to read the traditional key
instead of the remote start fob and then
uses the MyKey associated privileges.
Note: The MyKey system status menu
display may include the remote start system
as an additional key in the total count of
programed keys. See Checking MyKey
System Status (page 49).
50
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyKey (If Equipped)
As an added precaution, owners of vehicles
fitted with traditional keys may want to
program the remote start system as a
MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote
start fob. That way, when the MyKey driver
starts the vehicle with the remote start
system, the MyKey restrictions remain
active.
With a non-Ford-approved aftermarket
remote start system, it is possible to
program all keys as MyKeys
unintentionally. If this happens, then the
remote start fob is the admin key. If you
want to have only one key as a MyKey, or
do not want to have any MyKeys, then you
need to use your remote start to clear all
MyKeys. In that case, follow these steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Start your vehicle using your
non-Ford-approved remote start fob.
3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 48).
Follow Steps 1-3.
After clearing your MyKeys, you can create
a new MyKey. See Creating a MyKey
(page 47).
Note: For vehicles with Intelligent Access
keys (push-button start), you cannot
program the remote start system as a
MyKey. Always treat the remote start fob
as you would any other admin key.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
· The key or fob used to start the vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the
only admin key (there always has to be at least
one admin key).
· Vehicles with push-button start: The intelli-
gent access key fob is not positioned correctly
next to the steering column. See Ignition
Switch (page 104).
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems (page 50).
· The key or fob used to start your vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 47).
51
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyKey (If Equipped)
Potential CausesCondition
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems (page 50).
· The key or fob used to start your vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 47).
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems (page 50).
Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 58).
I lost a key
· The vehicle has a remote start system that is
recognized as an admin key. Clear all MyKeys
by using the remote start. See Using MyKey
With Remote Start Systems (page 50).
I accidentally programmed all keys as
MyKeys.
· The vehicle's system does not recognize any
programmed MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey
(page 47).
· An unknown key or fob has been created as
a MyKey.
MyKey total includes one additional key.
· The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
(page 50).
· An unknown key or fob has been programmed
to the vehicle as an admin key.
Admin key total includes one additional
key.
· The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
(page 50).
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and
created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
· An admin fob is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the Intelligent
Access key. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 47).
52
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyKey (If Equipped)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Note: Make sure you have locked your
vehicle before leaving it unattended.
Note: Do not leave the keys in your vehicle.
Locking
Locking With the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Locking With the Remote Control
Press the button.
Note: You can lock the driver door with the
key. Use the key when the remote control is
not functioning.
Unlocking (If Equipped)
Unlocking With the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
Unlocking With the Remote Control
Press the button.
Note: You can unlock the driver door with
the key. Use the key when the remote
control is not functioning.
Note: When you leave your vehicle
unattended for several weeks, the remote
control turns off.
Note: Unlock your vehicle and start the
engine using the key. Unlocking and starting
your vehicle once enables the remote
control.
Unlocking the Rear Cargo Doors
Press the button.
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function
You can reprogram the unlocking function
so that only the driver door unlocks. See
Remote Control (page 43).
Locking and Unlocking
Confirmation
When you lock the doors, the direction
indicators flash twice.
When you unlock the doors, the direction
indicators flash once and a tone sounds.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
From Inside
E148829
A
B
Lock.A
Unlock.B
53
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Locks
Opening and Closing the Sliding
Door
Opening the Sliding Door
E148804
Pull the interior door handle to open the
door.
Closing the Sliding Door
E171966
1
2
E172313
1
2
1. Pull the door handle to release the door
check feature.
2. Slide the door to close.
Opening and Closing the Double
Rear Doors
E148805
54
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Locks
E148806
E178366
1. Slide the lever to release the catch.
2. Fully open the cargo door.
Unlocking and Opening the Double
Rear Doors From Inside
E175828
1. Lift the locking button up.
E175955
2. Push the inner release lever down to
open the door.
55
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Locks
E148806
Rear Emergency Exit
Wagon and Bus
E179502
E179501
Pull the interior handle up to open the door
in an emergency.
Automatic Locking
You can set your vehicle's doors to lock
automatically when you exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). You can switch this on in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 78). If you have switched
automatic locking on, either use the interior
door unlock button or switch the ignition
off and use the key or remote control to
unlock the rear or sliding door.
Automatic Unlocking
You can switch this function on using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 78). If you have switched
this function on, the automatic unlocking
feature unlocks all doors within 10 minutes
of the end of a drive cycle, when the driver
door is opened and the ignition is off.
One-Stage Unlocking
You can switch on this function using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 78).
If you have switched on this function, you
unlock all doors including the rear doors
and the sliding door.
56
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Locks
Note: When you unlock the doors, the
direction indicators flash once.
You unlock all of the doors when you:
Press the unlock button on the remote
control once.
Press the interior unlock button once.
Two-Stage Unlocking
Note: When you unlock the doors, the
direction indicators flash once.
You unlock the front doors when you:
Press the unlock button on the remote
control once.
Press the interior unlock button once.
You unlock the front doors and cargo area
when you:
Press the unlock button on the remote
control once.
Press the unlock button on the remote
control twice within three seconds.
Zone Re-Locking (If Equipped)
If you enable zone re-locking and open one
door, all other doors remain locked. See an
authorized dealer for further information.
The locks on van, bus or wagon have two
zones, cabin and cargo. For van, the cargo
area includes the rear doors and the sliding
door. For bus or wagon, the cargo area
includes the rear doors.
Exit your vehicle and press the lock
button.
Press the unlock button or the cargo
area unlock button once to open the
respective zone.
If you now open a door within the unlocked
zone, the other doors in that zone
automatically lock.
Configurable Unlocking
Configurable unlocking is set when you
purchase your vehicle. It allows you to
select which doors unlock when you press,
once or twice, the unlock button or the
cargo area unlock button on your remote
control. You cannot switch this feature
back on if you had it switched off. See an
authorized dealer for further information.
57
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a
correctly coded key for your vehicle is used.
Using an incorrectly coded key may
prevent the engine from starting. A
message may appear in the information
display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The engine immobilization system arms
immediately after you switch the ignition
off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a correctly
coded key disarms the engine
immobilization system.
Replacement Keys
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts your
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
If your keys are lost or stolen and you do
not have a spare correctly coded key, you
will need to have your vehicle towed to an
authorized dealer. You need to erase the
coded keys from your vehicle and program
new coded keys.
Store an extra correctly coded key away
from the vehicle in a safe place to help
prevent any inconveniences. See an
authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed correctly coded keys and the
new unprogrammed key readily accessible.
See an authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed correctly coded keys are not
available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
correctly coded key into the ignition.
58
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Security
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first correctly coded key from the
ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously correctly
coded key into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed
correctly coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed correctly coded key,
insert the new unprogrammed key into
the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed
correctly coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If the key was not successfully
programmed, wait 10 seconds and repeat
Steps 1 through 8. If you are still
unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
Alarm System
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
through the doors, luggage compartment
and the hood.
Triggering the Alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any
of the following ways:
If someone opens a door, cargo area
or the hood without a valid key or
remote control.
If you switch the ignition on without a
valid key.
If the alarm is triggered, the horn will sound
for 30 seconds and the hazard warning
flasher will flash for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one of the
above will trigger the alarm again.
Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
Locks (page 53).
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching the
ignition on with a correctly coded key
within 12 seconds, or by unlocking the
doors or the cargo area with the remote
control.
59
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 93).
1
2
2
E95178
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
C
D
A
B
E129463
Volume upA
Seek up or nextB
Volume downC
Seek down or previousD
60
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Steering Wheel
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
Seek through a track.
AUDIO CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
Select the required source on the audio
unit.
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E129462
B
D
C
A
E
Volume upA
Seek up or nextB
Volume downC
Seek down or previousD
ModeE
Press M to select the audio source.
VOICE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
E129464
Pull the control to select or deselect voice
control. See SYNC (page 300).
VOICE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
E161798
Pull the control to select or deselect voice
control. See MyFord Touch (page 348).
See MyFord Touch (page 348).
61
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Steering Wheel
MyFord Touch® Controls (If Equipped)
Your steering wheel controls may also
have these additional features.
E142613
Press to go to the home screen.
E142608
Press to go to the information
screen.
See MyFord Touch (page 348).
CRUISE CONTROL
E142437
See Cruise Control (page 146).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E130248
See Information Displays (page 78).
62
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Defrost the windshield before you switch
the windshield wipers on.
Do not operate the windshield wipers on
a dry windshield. This may scratch the
glass, damage the wiper blades or cause
the wiper motor to overheat. Always use
the windshield washers before you switch
the windshield wipers on.
DCB
E169313
A
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Intermittent Wipe
C
B
A
E169314
Short wipe interval.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Long wipe interval.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
AUTOWIPERS
Defrost the windshield before you switch
the windshield wipers on.
Do not operate the windshield wipers on
a dry windshield. This may scratch the
glass, damage the wiper blades or cause
the wiper motor to overheat. Always use
the windshield washers before you switch
the windshield wipers on.
63
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wipers and Washers
C
B
A
E169314
High sensitivity.A
On.B
Low sensitivity.C
During wet or winter driving conditions
where ice, snow or a salty road mist is
present, inconsistent or unexpected wiping
or smearing may occur. In these conditions,
you can do the following:
Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
Switch autowipers off.
Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in
the area around the interior mirror. The
wipers will operate when the rain sensor
detects water on the windshield. The rain
sensor will continue to monitor the amount
of water on the windshield and
automatically adjust the speed of the
wipers.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield. When
you select high sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E169316
Pull the lever toward you to operate the
windshield washers. When you release the
lever, wiping will continue for a short period
of time.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
Note: Do not operate the windshield
washers for more than 10 seconds at a time.
64
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
A water puddle inside the lamp.
Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
Lighting Control Positions
E175211
A B C D
Off.A
Position lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
Autolamps.D
High Beams
E163718
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
65
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
E163719
Pull the lever slightly toward the steering
wheel.
Parking Lamps
Select position B on the lighting control to
switch the parking lamps on.
Note: Prolonged use of the parking lamps
will cause the battery to run out of charge.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them
on in the information display:
Configurable daytime running lamps.
Automatic high beam control.
Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 78).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
During a mist wipe.
When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
66
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Lighting
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
E175219
Press it repeatedly or press it and hold it
until the desired level is reached.
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
loses charge the instrument lighting will
return to its brightest setting.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls.
See Information Displays (page 78).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays
(page 78).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily
override autolamp control.
When switched off in the information
display, the daytime running lamps are off
in all lighting control switch positions.
67
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E162681
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Courtesy Lamp
E112207
BC
A
OffA
Door contactB
OnC
If you set the switch to position B, the
courtesy lamps will automatically turn on
when you unlock your vehicle or open a
door. If you leave a door open with the
ignition switched off, they will
automatically turn off after a short period
of time to prevent the vehicle battery from
losing charge. To switch them back on,
switch the ignition on for a short period of
time.
The courtesy lamps will automatically turn
on when you switch the ignition off. They
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time to prevent the vehicle
battery from losing charge.
If you set the switch to position C with the
ignition switched off, the courtesy lamps
will turn on. They will automatically turn
off after a short period of time to prevent
the vehicle battery from losing charge. To
switch them back on, switch the ignition
on for a short period of time.
Reading Lamps
E112208
If you switch the ignition off, the reading
lamps will automatically turn off after a
short period of time to prevent the vehicle
battery from losing charge. To switch them
back on, switch the ignition on for a short
period of time.
68
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E146043
Press the switch to open the window. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully opens.
Lift the switch to close the window. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
You can use the window switches for
several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
Driver Side One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Driver Side One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
To override this protection feature when
there is a resistance, for example in winter:
1. Close the window twice until it reaches
the point of resistance and let it
reverse.
2. Close the window a third time to the
point of resistance. The bounce-back
feature is now disabled and you can
close the window manually. The
window will go past the point of
resistance and you can close it fully.
If the window does not close after the third
attempt the system requires service.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
The bounce-back feature remains
turned off until it is reset.
1. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
2. Release the switch.
3. Lift the switch again for one more
second.
69
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Windows and Mirrors
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift the switch again for one more
second.
6. Open the window and then try to close
using the one-touch feature.
7. Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close using the one-touch
feature.
Note: If you have disconnected the battery,
you must reset the bounce-back memory.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E71280
B
C
A
Left-hand mirror.A
Off.B
Right-hand mirror.C
E71281
Move the controller in the direction of the
arrows to adjust the mirror.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when you unfold it.
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
70
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Windows and Mirrors
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
REAR QUARTER WINDOWS
Opening the Rear Windows (If
Equipped)
E170036
1
2
1. Press the unlock button to release the
catch.
Note: Depending on the lock type fitted,
you will have to either press the unlock
buttons together or down to release the
catch.
2. Hold the catch and push the window
open. Make sure the catch engages.
Note: There is an audible click when the
catch engages.
Closing the Rear Windows
1. Hold and pull the catch to close the
window.
2. Press the catch to engage the lock.
Note: There is an audible click when the
lock engages.
71
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E184961
Information display. See Information Displays (page 78).A
Speedometer.B
Engine coolant temperature gauge.C
Tripmeter reset and distance to empty toggle button.D
Fuel gauge.E
Tachometer.F
Information Display
Odometer
Registers the distance your vehicle has
traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See Trip Computer (page 81).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 78).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
At normal operating temperature, the
needle will remain in the center section.
72
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Instrument Cluster
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
engine off. Determine the cause once the
engine has cooled down. See Engine
Coolant Check (page ?).
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been determined
and resolved.
Tripmeter Reset and Distance to
Empty (If Equipped)
Press the button to change between the
tripmeter and distance to empty
information. Press and hold the button to
reset the tripmeter.
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side
of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at 1/16th.
Variations:
Distance-to-emptyFuel gauge positionDriving type (fuel economy
conditions)
35 miles to 80 miles (56 km
to 129 km)
1/16thHighway driving
35 miles (56km)1/16thSevere duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)
73
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Brake System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle will
continue to have normal braking without
Anti-lock brake system function. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Brake System
WARNINGS
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal
injury.
E138644
It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Switch off all
unnecessary electrical equipment. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Diesel Warning Lamps (If Equipped)
The following warning lamps are unique
for vehicles equipped with a diesel engine.
Exhaust Emission Fluid
E163176
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates the diesel
exhaust fluid is low. See
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
(page 115).
If it illuminates when you are driving, and
the diesel exhaust fluid is at a sufficient
level, this indicates a system malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
Glow Plug
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on, wait until it
extinguishes before starting the
engine.
74
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Instrument Cluster
Water In Fuel
It will illuminate if there is excess
water in the fuel filter. Drain off
the water immediately. See
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap
(page 210). If it illuminates after draining
the water, this indicates a fuel filter service
is required. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately.
Direction Indicator
Flashes during operation. A
sudden increase in the rate of
flashing warns of a failed
indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 217).
Door Ajar
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and remains on if
any door or the hood is open.
Engine Coolant Temperature
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
engine off. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Engine Warning Lamps
Malfunction Indicator
Service Required
All Vehicles
If either lamp illuminates when the engine
is running, this indicates a malfunction. The
engine will continue to run but it may have
limited power. If either lamp flashes when
you are driving, reduce the speed of your
vehicle immediately. If it continues to flash,
avoid heavy acceleration or deceleration.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
If both lamps illuminate when the engine
is running, stop your vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so. You may notice a reduction
in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine
power. Switch the ignition off and attempt
to restart the engine. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, this
indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the headlamp high beam on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Lane Departure
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off.
75
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Instrument Cluster
It will illuminate when the system is not
available and may indicate a system
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Level
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate if the tire
pressure in one or more tires is
below the correct pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 251).
Message Center Warning
It will illuminate when a new
message is stored in the
information display. It will be red
or amber in color depending on the severity
of the message and will remain on until the
cause of the message has been rectified.
See Information Messages (page 83).
Oil Pressure
WARNING
If it illuminates when you are driving
do not continue your journey, even if
the oil level is correct. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
If it stays on after starting the
engine or illuminates when you
are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so and switch the engine off.
Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil
Check (page 204).
Park Lamp
It will illuminate when you switch
the headlamp low beam or the
side and tail lamps on.
Safety Belt Minder
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt. See Safety
Belt Minder (page 30).
Stability Control
E138639
It will illuminate for a short
period of time when you switch
the ignition on. If it illuminates
when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction, the
system turns off. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Note: While driving, it flashes when the
system is operating.
Transmission Tow/Haul
E161509
It will illuminate when you switch
the system on. See Automatic
Transmission (page 132).
If the warning lamp flashes continuously,
this indicates a malfunction and damage
to the transmission could occur. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Airbag Secondary Warning
Sounds when there is a fault with the
airbag system and the airbag warning
lamp.
76
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Instrument Cluster
Door Ajar
Sounds when a door is not fully closed and
your vehicle is moving.
Exterior Lamps On
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver door, and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Gearshift Lever not in Park (P)
Sounds when the driver door is open, the
key is in the ignition and the gearshift lever
is not in park (P).
Key in Ignition
Sounds when the driver door is open and
the key is in the ignition.
Parking Brake On
Sounds when the parking brake is on and
your vehicle is moving. If the warning chime
continues to sound when you release the
parking brake, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Safety Belt Minder
WARNINGS
The safety belt minder remains in
stand-by mode when the front safety
belts have been fastened. It will
sound if either safety belt is unfastened.
Do not sit on top of a fastened safety
belt to prevent the safety belt minder
from coming on. The occupant
protection system will only provide
optimum protection when you use the
safety belt correctly.
Sounds when a safety belt is unfastened
in an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.
77
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
The information display shows the
corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
E138659
Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
submenu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
submenu.
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Menu Structure - Information
Display
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip computer1
Message
Trip computer
Dist to empty
Trip odometer
Trip Timer
78
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
Message
Average Fuel
All values
1 See Trip Computer (page 81). See Gauges (page 72).
Information
Message
Driver Alert
DEF level
Engine Hours
Idle:
Engine Hours
Running:
Trailer Brake
Gain:
System check
Settings
ActionMessage
OffDriver AlertDriver Assist
ElectricTrailer Brake
E.-Hydraulic
SensitivityLane Keeping
Intensity
Manual or xx SecondsHdlamp DelayLighting
Choose your applicable
setting
Rain Light
Choose your applicable
setting
LanguageDisplay
79
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Choose your applicable
setting
Distance
Choose your applicable
setting
Temp unit
Show - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
CompassConvenience
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
Global Unlock
Hold OK to Reset System to Factory DefaultSystem Reset
System Check
All active warnings will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll
through the list. See Information
Messages (page 83).
Menu Structure - Information and
Entertainment Display
You can access the menu using the
information and entertainment display
control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
SYNC-Media allows you to access the
SYNC features.
SYNC-Phone
Message
Dial a number
Phone Redial
Phonebook
Incoming callsCall History
Outgoing calls
Missed calls
Speed Dial
Text messaging
80
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
Message
BT Devices
Set as masterPhone settings
Phonebook pref.
Set ringtone
Phone status
Text msg notify
Emerg. Assist.
SYNC-Menu
Message
Bluetooth onSYNC-Settings
Set defaults
Master reset
System info
Voice settings
Browse USB
SYNC-Apps
TRIP COMPUTER
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold OK on the current screen
to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and average fuel consumption information.
All Values
Indicates all the respective trip, distance,
time and average fuel consumption
information.
Average Fuel Consumption
Indicates the average fuel consumption
since the function was last reset.
Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
81
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
Trip Odometer
Registers the distance traveled of
individual journeys.
Trip Timer
Registers the elapsed time of individual
journeys or the total time since the function
was last reset.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Measure Units
You can choose personalized settings
using the information display control on
the steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 78).
To swap between imperial and metric units, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Display
Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button.Measure unit
Swapping between imperial and metric units will affect the
following displays:
Average fuel consumption.
Distance to empty.
Odometer.
Outside temperature units.
Trip odometer.
Switching Chimes Off or On
You can switch chimes off or on using the
information display control on the steering
wheel. See Information Displays (page
78).
To switch chimes off or on, scroll to:
ActionMessage
Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button.Warning
Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button.Information
Note: The default setting is on.
Note: You cannot switch safety warning message chimes off.
82
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
INFORMATION MESSAGES
E130248
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus. The
information display will automatically
remove other messages after a short
period of time.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
The message indicator
illuminates to supplement some
messages. The message
indicator will be red or amber depending
on the severity of the relevant system
condition. The message indicator will
remain on until a system repair is
completed.
A system-specific symbol with a message
indicator may supplement some
messages.
Airbag
Description and ActionMessage
The system has detected a fault that requires service.Airbag fault Service now
Battery and Charging System
Description and ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
ignition off. The system has detected a fault that requires
service.
Electrical system over-
voltage Stop safely
Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems and devices.
The system has detected a fault that requires service.
Battery low See manual
83
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Description and ActionMessage
Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
diesel exhaust fluid tank will be empty. Refill the diesel
exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level low Range XXX
mi Refill now
Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
diesel exhaust fluid tank will be empty and when it will restrict
your vehicle speed. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon
as possible.
DEF level empty YY MPH
max in XXX mi
Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
your vehicle speed is being restricted. Refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level empty Speed
limited to YY MPH
Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
your vehicle speed will be restricted when you restart your
vehicle. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level empty YY MPH
max Upon restart
Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
the engine will soon be restricted to idle operation.
DEF level empty Engine
idled soon
Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
the engine is restricted to idle operation.
DEF level empty Engine
idled See manual
Indicates that your vehicle speed will soon be restricted. The
system has detected a fault that requires service.
DEF fault YY MPH max in
XXXX mi
Indicates that your vehicle speed is restricted. The system
has detected a fault that requires service.
DEF fault Speed limited
to YY MPH
Indicates that the engine will soon be restricted to idle oper-
ation. The system has detected a fault that requires service.
DEF fault Engine idled
soon
Indicates that the engine is restricted to idle operation. The
system has detected a fault that requires service.
DEF fault Engine idled
See manual
Indicates that your vehicle speed will be restricted when you
restart your vehicle. The system has detected a fault that
requires service.
DEF level empty YY MPH
max Upon restart
Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank from empty, there may be a short period
before the increased diesel exhaust fluid level is registered. The system must register the
increased diesel exhaust fluid level before your vehicle will return to full power.
84
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
Door Open
Description and ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.
Driver door ajar
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.
Driver side rear door ajar
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.
Passenger door ajar
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.
Passenger side rear door
ajar
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
hood.
Hood open
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.
Rear load compartment
door ajar
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.
Emergency rear door ajar
Engine
Description and ActionMessage
The system has detected a fault that requires service.Engine fault Service now
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, allow the
engine to cool and then check the coolant level. If the warning
remains on when you have checked the coolant level, the
system has detected a fault that requires service. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 206).
High engine temperature
Stop safely
Lighting
Description and ActionMessage
Indicates that a brake lamp bulb has burned out. See Main-
tenance (page 200).
Brake lamp Bulb fault
Indicates that a low beam headlamp bulb has burned out.
See Maintenance (page 200).
Low beam Bulb fault
The system has detected a fault that requires service.Headlamp fault Service
required
85
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
Description and ActionMessage
The engine oil has exceeded the service time or distance limit.
Renew the engine oil and oil filter as soon as possible. See
Engine Oil Check (page 204).
Oil change required
The system has detected a fault that requires service. See
Brake Fluid Check (page 210).
Brake fluid level low
Service now
Refill the washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 210).
Washer fluid level low
Parking Aid
Description and ActionMessage
The system has detected a fault that requires service. See
Parking Aid (page 142).
Parking aid fault Service
required
Parking Brake
Description and ActionMessage
The parking brake is applied and your vehicle speed is above
3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning remains on when you have
released the parking brake, the system has detected a fault
that requires service.
Park brake applied
Starting System
Description and ActionMessage
Press the brake pedal before you start the engine.Press brake to start
Indicates that the engine has failed to start.Cranking time exceeded
86
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Description and ActionMessage
The tire pressure is low in one or more tires, check the tire
pressures. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
251).
Low Tire Pressure
The system has detected a fault that requires service.Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
The system has detected a fault that requires service or the
spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 251).
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Water in Fuel
Description and ActionMessage
Drain off the water immediately. See Draining the Fuel
Filter Water Trap (page 210).
Water detected in fuel
Service required
87
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Information Displays
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Outside Air
Keep the air intakes in front of the
windshield free from obstruction (such as
snow or leaves) to allow the climate
control system to function effectively.
Recirculated Air
WARNING
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to mist up. If the
windows mist up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. Outside air does
not enter your vehicle.
Heating
Heating performance depends on the
temperature of the engine coolant.
General Information on Controlling
the Interior Climate
Fully close all the windows.
Warming the Interior
Direct the air toward your feet. In cold or
humid weather conditions, direct some of
the air toward the windshield and the door
windows.
Cooling the Interior
Direct the air toward your face.
Air Conditioning
The system directs air through the
evaporator for cooling. The evaporator
extracts humidity from the air to help keep
the windows free of mist. The system
directs the resulting condensation to the
outside of your vehicle, which may cause
a small pool to form under your vehicle.
This is normal.
Note: The air conditioning operates only
when the temperature is above 39°F (4°C).
Note: When you use air conditioning, your
vehicle uses more fuel.
AIR VENTS
To close a vent, slide the airflow direction
adjuster down.
Center Air Vents
E169287
Side Air Vent
E169288
88
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E147011
A EB DC
Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust
to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the
windshield may fog up.
A
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates and
the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce
the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering
your vehicle.
B
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature. If you select MAX A/C, the
system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents. This
mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. Turn the
temperature control to maximum heat to turn the auxiliary heater on
C
Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. To
improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows
open for two to three minutes.
D
Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air distribution.E
Select to distribute air through
the instrument panel air vents.
Select to distribute air through
the instrument panel air vents
and footwell air vents.
Select to distribute air through
the footwell air vents.
Select to distribute air through
the windshield air vents and
footwell air vents.
89
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Climate Control
Select to distribute air through
the windshield air vents. You can
also use this setting to defog or
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice. You can also increase the temperature
and fan speed to improve clearing.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: A small amount of air may be felt
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Keep the air intakes in front of the
windshield free from obstruction (such as
snow or leaves) to allow the climate control
system to function effectively.
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position. Increase the temperature
and fan speed and press the A/C button to
improve clearing, if required.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell air vents position.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell and windshield air vents
position.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel air vents position.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel air vents position.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended
Periods During Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
Apply the parking brake.
Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or neutral.
Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
Adjust the fan speed to the lowest
speed setting.
90
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Climate Control
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel and windshield air
vents positions.
Press the A/C button.
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
Direct the instrument panel side air
vents toward the side windows.
Close the instrument panel vents.
Maximum Cooling Performance in
Instrument Panel or Instrument
Panel and Footwell Positions
Adjust the temperature control to the
lowest setting.
Press the A/C and recirculated air
buttons.
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting initially and then adjust it to suit
the desired comfort level.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
E175829
A B
Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust
to select the desired fan speed or switch off.
A
Temperature and air distribution control: Controls the temperature of the
air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature and
distribution. Cool air distributes through the top air vents and warm air distributes
through the footwell air vents.
B
91
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Climate Control
Note: Switch the air conditioning on to cool
the air through the rear air vents.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window (If Equipped)
E72507
The heated rear window button is located
on the instrument panel. Press the button
to clear the heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. Press the button again to switch
the heated rear window off. It will turn off
automatically after a short period of time.
Note: Make sure that the engine is running
before switching the heated rear window
on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or sharp
objects to clean the inside of the heated rear
window. Do not use razor blades or sharp
objects to remove decals from of the inside
of the heated rear window. The vehicle
warranty does not cover damage to the
heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
The heated exterior mirrors will clear the
mirror glass of thin ice and fog. They will
turn off automatically after a short period
of time.
Note: Do not use razor blades or sharp
objects to remove ice from the mirror glass
or attempt to adjust the mirror glass when
it is frozen in place. The vehicle warranty
does not cover damage to the mirror glass
or mirror assembly.
Note: Do not clean the mirror glass or mirror
assembly with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: On vehicles without a heated exterior
mirror switch, they will turn on automatically
when you switch the heated rear window
on.
92
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Do not recline the seat backrest too
far as this can cause the occupant
to slide under the safety belt,
resulting in serious injury in the event of a
crash.
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seat backrest reclined too
far, can result in serious injury or
death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat backrest, with
your feet on the floor.
Do not place objects higher than the
seat backrest to reduce the risk of
serious injury in the event of a crash
or during heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
Do not recline the seat backrest more
than 30 degrees.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
The adjustable head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and correctly
adjusted when the seat is occupied. An
incorrectly adjusted head restraint may
provide reduced protection to an occupant
during certain rear impacts.
93
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
The head restraint consists of:
E138642
Energy absorbing head restraint.A
Steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
WARNING
Adjust the head restraints for all
passengers before you drive your
vehicle. This will help minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Do not adjust the head restraints when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible.
Raising the Head Restraint
Lift the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
WARNING
Do not remove the head restraint
from an occupied seat.
1. Lift the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Remove the head restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint
WARNING
Install head restraints correctly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
1. Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Push the head restraint down.
MANUAL SEATS
Moving the Seat Backward or
Forward
WARNINGS
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
Do not adjust the driver seat when
your vehicle is moving. This may
result in sudden seat movement,
causing the loss of control of your vehicle.
94
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Make sure the driver seat fully locks
into place by rocking it backward and
forward.
E177638
1. Lift the handle.
2. Move the seat backward or forward to
attain the desired position.
3. Release the handle.
Note: The driver seat has removable stop
bolts on the track to enable access to the
vehicle battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 213).
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E146386
1. Rotate the handle clockwise or counter
clockwise to attain the desired lumbar
support.
Recline Adjustment
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat backrest
when your vehicle is moving. This
may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
Do not adjust the recliner from inside
your vehicle if the seat is unoccupied.
The seat back may move suddenly
and cause personal injury.
95
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
E175474
1. Lift the handle.
2. Move the seat back backward or
forward to attain the desired position.
3. Release the handle.
Adjusting the Armrest
3
E95256
1
2
1. Raise the armrest fully.
2. Lower the armrest to the stowed
position.
3. Raise the armrest to attain the desired
position.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat when
your vehicle is moving.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
The driver seat has removable stop
bolts on the track to enable access
to the vehicle battery. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 213).
96
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
E138647
Power Lumbar
E138648
REAR SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not use the bench seats as a bed
when your vehicle is moving. Failure
to follow this warning could result in
serious personal injury or death.
Do not place objects on a folded
seat. Hard objects may become
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop,
which may increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
Note: Rear seat arrangements vary
depending on the vehicle.
97
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
Recline Adjustment
WARNINGS
When reclining the seat backrest
forward and backward, take care not
to get your hands caught between
the seat backrest and the frame, catches
or mechanism. Failure to take care may
result in personal injury.
Make sure that any cargo or objects
are not trapped behind the seat
backrest. Make sure the safety belts
are not trapped in any way when unfolding
the seat backrest up. Failure of an
occupant to be able to use a trapped
safety belt increases the risk of serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure that the seat backrest is
fully engaged in its catch. A seat
backrest which is not fully engaged
in its catch could move in the event of an
accident. This may result in serious
personal injury or death.
E172224
With the seat occupied, pull the lever or
strap to recline or raise the seat backrest.
Removing Seats, 12 & 15 Passenger
Vehicles
WARNINGS
Seats can weigh up to 132 lb (60 kg).
Do not attempt to lift or carry a seat
on your own.
Do not use the release handles to lift
or carry the seat.
98
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
E173870
1
2
3
1. Pull the release handles up.
2. Tilt the seat forward to release the seat
frame rear catches.
3. Pull the seat backward to release the
seat frame front catches.
4. Remove the seat.
Note: Two persons must carry out this
procedure.
Note: You can only remove seats that have
integral release handles.
Note: The seat back does not fold forward.
Installing the Seats
WARNINGS
Make sure that the floor catches are
free from foreign material before
installing the seats.
Make sure that you securely fasten
the seat catches when installing.
Check the latches are correctly
engaged by checking the red latch
indicators.
E178062
99
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
1. Align the seat frame front catches.
2. Push the seat forward to engage the
seat frame front catches.
3. Align the seat frame rear catches.
4. Allow the seat to drop under its own
weight for the last 6-8 in (15-20 cm).
100
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Do not use the power points for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power points.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the
power points.
Note: Do not use the power points over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or a
fuse may blow.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Note: Incorrect use of the power points can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
Do not use the power points for longer
than necessary when the engine is not
running.
Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when your vehicle is in park
(P) for extended periods of time.
Note: The power point turns off after 30
minutes if you switched the ignition on
without the engine running.
Auxiliary Power Point Locations
E185878
Auxiliary Power Point locations may be:
On the instrument panel.
Inside the floor console storage
compartment.
Inside the cargo area.
Note: Do not keep electrical devices or
adaptors plugged in to the auxiliary power
point when not in use.
AC Power Point
WARNING
Do not use any extension cord with
the AC power point, since it will
defeat the safety protection design
provided by the cap and twist tab. Doing
so may cause the power point to overload
due to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and
could result in fire or personal injury.
101
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
E143941
Use the AC power point for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. You can find it under the parking
brake lever.
Note: Do not keep electrical devices or
adaptors plugged in to the AC power point
when not in use.
When the green indicator light, located on
the AC power point, is:
On AC power point is ready to supply
power.
Off AC power point is not ready to
supply power or you ignition is not
switched on.
Flashing AC power point is in fault
mode.
If you exceed the 150 watts limit, then the
AC power point temporarily turns off.
The indicator light flashes if the power
point detects overloading, overheating, or
shorting conditions. For overloaded or
shorted conditions, unplug your device and
switch the ignition off then back on. For an
overheated condition, let the system cool
down and switch the ignition off then back
on.
The AC power point is not suitable for use
with all electrical devices, for example:
Tube type televisions.
Vacuum cleaners.
Power tools.
Compressor-driven refrigerators.
Medical or measuring equipment that
must process precise data.
Appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply, for example:
Microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets.
Touch-sensor lamps.
CIGAR LIGHTER (If Equipped)
E103382
Press the element in to use the cigar
lighter. It will pop out automatically.
Note: Do not press and hold the cigar lighter
element.
102
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CUP HOLDERS
WARNINGS
Do not place hot drinks in the cup
holders when your vehicle is moving.
Make sure that cups placed in the
holders do not obstruct your vision
while driving.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Storage Compartments
Overhead Console
WARNING
Do not place heavy objects in the
overhead console. Heavy objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop and may increase the risk of
serious injury.
E189357
BOTTLE HOLDER
WARNING
Do not place glass objects in the
bottle holder.
E171160
103
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E72128
0(off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in
position I or II (without the engine running)
for too long to avoid vehicle battery losing
charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.
Warning lamps and indicators are
illuminated.
III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the
key as soon as the engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
Before starting the engine check
the following:
Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
Make sure the parking brake is on.
Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
104
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key to position II to
switch the ignition on.
3. Turn the ignition key to position III to
start your vehicle. Release the key
when the engine starts.
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time, for example 10
seconds. The number of start attempts is
limited to approximately six. If you exceed
this limit, the system will not allow you to
try again until a period of time has elapsed,
for example 30 minutes.
Engine Idle Speed after Starting
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting will adjust
automatically to minimize vehicle
emissions and maximize cabin comfort
and fuel economy.
The idle speed will vary depending on
certain factors. These include vehicle
component and ambient temperatures as
well as electrical and climate system
demands.
Cold or Hot Engine
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds, wait for a short period and try
again.
If the engine does not start after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow the
flooded engine procedure.
If you have difficulty starting the engine
when the temperature is below -13°F
(-25°C), press the accelerator pedal to the
mid-way point of its travel and try again.
Flooded Engine
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Note: If the engine does not start, repeat
the cold or hot engine procedure.
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
WARNINGS
Do not use starting fluid, for example
ether, in the air intake system (see
air filter decal). Starting fluids could
cause immediate explosive damage to the
engine. Failure to follow this warning could
result in fire, serious personal injury or
death.
Do not add gasoline, gasohol, alcohol
or Kerosene to diesel fuel. This action
creates a serious fire hazard and will
result in poor engine performance. Engine
damage caused by the use of incorrect fuel
is not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Note: Avoid shutting the engine down after
an extensive idling period. Drive your vehicle
for several miles with the engine at normal
operating temperatures under a moderate
load.
Engine Glow Plugs
The powertrain control and glow plug
control modules operate the glow plug
system. When you switch the ignition on
the glow plug control module immediately
energizes the glow plugs. The glow plug
control module using the engine coolant
temperature, barometric pressure sensor
105
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
and the environmental temperature sensor
will determine how long the glow plugs
stay energized. The required time for the
glow plugs to remain energized will
decrease as the engine coolant
temperature, barometric pressure and the
environmental temperature increases.
When you switch the ignition on, the glow
plug indicator lamp will illuminate if glow
plug heat is necessary as a starting aid.
Wait until the glow plug indicator lamp
turns off before starting the engine. The
lamp should always momentarily
illuminate when the engine is cold and you
switch the ignition on.
Cold Weather Operation
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle
speed if left idling in park (P). As the engine
warms-up, the engine sound level
decreases due to the activation of
powertrain control module controlled
sound reduction features.
It is recommended that the engine block
heater be used for starting when the
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See
Engine Block Heater (page 107).
Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
the engine to its normal operating
temperature. Long periods of idling,
especially in cold weather, can cause a
buildup of deposits which can cause engine
damage.
Starting a Cold or Hot Engine
Note: Do not press the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key to position II and
wait until the glow plug indicator lamp
turns off.
Note: Do not press the accelerator pedal.
3. Turn the ignition key to position III until
the engine starts.
4. Release the key.
Note: You may need to crank the engine for
up to 10 seconds when the outside air
temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below.
Note: Engine power may be reduced for 15
seconds when the engine oil temperature
is -9°F (-23°C) or below. This is to allow
the turbocharger to be lubricated.
Note: If the engine fails to start after a
number of attempts, the system will not
allow you to operate the starter for a short
period of time, for example 30 minutes.
Failure to Start
If the engine does not crank with the
ignition key turned to position III while the
brake pedal is fully depressed, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Release the brake pedal.
Note: Make sure the parking brake is fully
applied.
3. Fully depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition key to position II and
wait until the glow plug indicator lamp
turns off.
Note: Do not press the accelerator pedal.
5. Turn the ignition key to position III until
the engine starts.
6. Release the key.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
The filter forms part of the emissions
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
exhaust gas.
106
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Regeneration
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after you
have switched the engine off. This is a
potential fire hazard.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to the high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration
process.
Note: After you have switched your engine
off the fans may continue to run for a short
period of time.
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
out this process automatically.
If your journeys meet one of the following
conditions:
You drive only short distances.
You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.
You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
Do not switch the ignition off.
Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
Vehicles With a Turbocharger
WARNING
Do not switch the engine off when it
is running at high speed. If you do, the
turbocharger will continue running
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
to zero. This will lead to premature
turbocharger bearing wear.
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until
the engine has reached idle speed and then
switch it off.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
107
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WARNINGS
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
Do not use multiple extension cords.
Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
108
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel
capless fuel system), do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience an adverse reaction.
109
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
Note: Use of any fuel other than
recommended fuel can cause powertrain
damage, impair the emission control system
or cause loss of vehicle performance. Any
damage to vehicle that is caused by use of
fuel not recommended will not be covered
under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel Without
a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or
UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E-85) in your
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV). If your vehicle is
flex fuel capable, the fuel fill inlet will have
a yellow housing.
Do not use:
Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E-85 fuel.
Fuel with methanol.
Fuels containing metallic based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT)
Leaded fuel (The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
Choosing the Right Fuel With a
Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or
UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E-85) in your
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV). If your vehicle is
flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel
placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Do not use:
Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E-100 fuel.
Fuel with methanol.
Fuels containing metallic based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT)
Leaded fuel (The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
Octane Recommendations
E161513
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving
conditions while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, see your
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87. To provide improved
performance, we recommend premium
fuel for severe duty usage, such as trailer
tow.
110
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
3.7L Engine
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87.
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL
Fuel Requirements - Choosing the
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands and Other Locales)
WARNINGS
Only use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel
(ULSD) containing a maximum of 15
ppm sulfur and up to 20% biodiesel
(B20). These fuels should meet the diesel
specifications defined by American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D975 for
diesel and by ASTM D7467 for B6-B20
blends, or an equivalent local market
specification.
Do not mix diesel with oil, kerosene,
paraffin, gasoline or other liquids to
diesel. This can cause damage to the
fuel system.
Do not use home heating oil,
agricultural fuel, raw fats, oils, waste
cooking greases, biodiesel fuels
greater than 20% or any diesel fuel not
intended for highway use.
The vehicle warranty will not cover
damage caused by using an improper
type of fuel or fuel additive.
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with
diesel fuel under any circumstances.
Blending used oil with the fuel will
significantly increase your vehicles exhaust
emissions and reduce engine life due to
increased internal wear.
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Not Required
Use only a diesel engine configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
designed to use only ultra-low sulfur diesel
fuel may result in damage to engine
emission control devices and the
after-treatment system, potentially
rendering your vehicle inoperable.
For the engine to operate reliably on low
sulfur or high sulfur diesel fuel, the engine
must be a factory built high sulfur engine
(available as a dealer order option for
select markets) or an ultra-low sulfur
diesel fuel configured engine that has been
retrofitted for high sulfur diesel fuel using
Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
Failure to use retrofit components other
than those available through your
authorized dealer will result in coolant
system damage, engine overheating,
selective catalyst reduction system or
diesel particulate filter damage and
possible base engine damage.
Vehicles with engines configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel are only
available for sale in countries where
ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
available or mandated by the government.
Vehicles originally sold in a ultra-low sulfur
diesel fuel market that are subsequently
111
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
exported to non ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel
markets will need to be retrofitted (at the
customers expense using Ford authorized
dealer service parts) in order to be reliably
operated on non ultra-low sulfur diesel
fuel.
Biodiesel
You may operate your vehicle on diesel
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20.
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted
product from renewable fuel sources, such
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste
cooking greases.
To help achieve acceptable engine
performance and durability when using
biodiesel in your vehicle:
Confirm the biodiesel content of the
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less
by checking the label on the fuel pump.
Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality
that complies with applicable industry
standards ASTM D975 for diesel and
ASTM D7467 for B6-B20 blends.
Follow the recommended service
maintenance intervals. See Normal
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
tank for more than one month.
Do not use raw oils, fats or waste
cooking greases.
System Messages
Action and DescriptionMessage
Consider changing brands or reducing biodiesel content if
you have cold temperature fuel gelling issues or this message
frequently appears.
LOW FUEL PRESSURE
Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater
than 20% may cause damage to your
vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
after-treatment hardware (exhaust
catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
When using biodiesel in concentrations
greater than 20%, this can also cause fuel
filter restrictions that may result in a lack
of power or damage to fuel system
components, including fuel pump and fuel
injector failures. See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
(page 445). .
Look for a label on the fuel pump to
confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel fuel blends with
greater than 5% must be labeled.
Biodiesel content is often indicated with
the letter B followed by the percent of
biodiesel in the fuel. For example, B20
indicates a fuel containing 20% biodiesel.
Ask the service station attendant to
confirm the biodiesel content of a diesel
fuel if you do not see a label on the fuel
pump.
Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than
diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
should not be stored in the fuel tank for
more than one month. If you plan to park
or store your vehicle for more than one
month, then you should empty your vehicle
fuel tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill
the tank with a pure petroleum-based
diesel fuel and run your vehicle for a
minimum of 30 minutes.
112
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
If you intend to store your vehicle for more
than two months, we recommend that you
seek advice from an authorized dealer.
Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
damage fuel system seals and plastics and
corrode steel parts.
During cold weather, if you have problems
operating on biodiesel, you may need to
use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel
content, try another brand, or discontinue
the use of biodiesel.
Diesel Fuel Additives
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms
to ASTM industry specifications.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine.
Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an
equivalent cetane booster additive if you
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use
Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance
improver or an equivalent additive if there
is fuel gelling during cold weather.
Do not use alcohol-based additives to
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol
additives may result in damage to the fuel
injectors and system.
Your warranty may not cover repairs
needed to correct the effects of using an
aftermarket product that does not meet
Ford specifications in your fuel.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the under
seat storage compartment.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
113
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page ?).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
filler cap.
E156223
2. Insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during use, and after you have switched
the engine off. This is a potential fire
hazard.
Driving with a Catalytic Converter
WARNINGS
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not crank the engine for long
periods.
Do not run the engine when a spark
plug lead is disconnected.
Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See
Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
177).
Do not switch the ignition off when
driving.
114
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
WARNINGS
You must refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank when it is low. If it is not
refilled, vehicle speed will be limited
to 50 mph (80 km/h). Drive with caution
and refill the fluid tank as soon as possible.
If the diesel exhaust fluid becomes
contaminated your vehicle will be
limited to idle speed operation.
Replace the fluid immediately.
Tampering with or disabling the
selective catalytic reduction system
will result in severe vehicle
performance limitation. Vehicle speed will
be limited to 6 mph (10 km/h).
Your vehicle has a selective catalytic
reduction system to help reduce exhaust
emission levels by injecting diesel exhaust
fluid into the exhaust system.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level
For the system to operate correctly, you
must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid
level.
E163176
A warning lamp will illuminate
when the diesel exhaust fluid
level is low and needs to be
refilled. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 74).
The warning lamp will illuminate
approximately 500 mi (800 km) before
the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty. Refill
the tank as soon as possible.
Note: If the warning lamp illuminates when
your vehicle is moving, and the diesel
exhaust fluid is at a sufficient level, this
indicates a system malfunction. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Continued driving without refilling the fluid
will result in:
Vehicle speed being limited. Prior to
this occurring a message will appear in
the information display.
Further vehicle operation without
refilling the diesel exhaust fluid will
cause the engine to run at idle speed.
Note: You must add a minimum of 3.2 qt
(3 L) for your vehicle to exit the run at idle
speed mode.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
WARNINGS
Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to
come into contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. Should the fluid come into
contact with eyes, flush them with plenty
of water and contact a physician. Clean
affected skin with soap and water. If
swallowed, drink plenty of water and
contact a physician immediately.
Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank in
a well-ventilated area. When
removing the tank cap or a diesel
exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia
vapor may escape. Ammonia vapor is an
irritant to the eyes, skin and mucous
membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapor can
cause burning to the eyes, throat and nose
resulting in watering eyes or severe
coughing.
Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
fuel tank. This can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
115
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E172245
The diesel exhaust fluid tank filler neck is
located below the fuel filler neck and has
a blue cap. Fill the tank using a fluid pump
at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a
diesel exhaust fluid container. We
recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust
fluid, the containers are spill proof and stop
the flow of fluid when the tank is full. The
capacity of the diesel exhaust fluid tank is
21 liters.
E163354
)
E163354
You must only use diesel exhaust fluid that
is certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Note: You must open the fuel filler door
before you can open the diesel exhaust fluid
filler door.
Note: Immediately wash off any diesel
exhaust fluid that has spilled on to a painted
surface with soapy water.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using
a pump is similar to a refuelling your
vehicle. The diesel exhaust fluid pump
nozzle will shut off automatically when the
tank is full.
Note: Some filling stations utilize a
magnetic mechanism in the pump nozzle
that may prevent refilling the diesel exhaust
fluid tank. To overcome this issue you will
need to locate another filling station or use
a refill container.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Container
The following procedure applies to
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar
fluid containers. Always follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap. Place the spout on to
the container and tighten it until you
feel a strong resistance.
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap.
3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until
the seal on the spout seats on to the
filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank.
When the tank is full the fluid will stop
flowing automatically.
4. Return the container to the vertical
position slightly below the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid
remaining in the spout to drain back in
to the container.
5. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the
diesel exhaust fluid tank cap.
116
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
6. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid container and replace the
cap.
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in
the container retain it for later use. The
spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with
clean water prior to storage. Do not use the
diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
fluid.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in
Cold Climates
Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the
ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
Your vehicle has a preheating system
which allows diesel exhaust fluid to
operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not
use your vehicle for an extended period
when the ambient temperature is below
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid
freezes it may damage the tank. This is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust
Fluid or Inoperative Selective
Catalytic Reduction System
E163176
If the system becomes
contaminated or inoperative, the
diesel exhaust fluid warning
lamp will illuminate and a message will
appear in the information display.
Continued driving without replacing the
fluid or not having the system repaired will
result in:
Vehicle speed being limited. Prior to
this occurring a message will appear in
the information display.
Further vehicle operation without
replacing contaminated diesel exhaust
fluid will cause the engine to run at idle
speed.
Note: If the vehicle speed becomes limited
or the engine will only run at idle speed,
normal vehicle operation will not resume
until you have the system repaired. To
service a contaminated or inoperative
system, see an authorized dealer.
Note: You must add a minimum of 3.2 qt
(3 L) for your vehicle to exit the run at idle
speed mode.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines
Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
vehicle fuel tank.
Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
water or any other liquid.
Do not re-use a diesel exhaust fluid
container.
Do not store in direct sunlight.
Store at temperatures between 23°F
(-5°C) and 68°F (20°C).
Do not store a diesel exhaust fluid
container in your vehicle.
Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable,
non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble.
Approximate Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Usage
The chart below illustrates the
approximate diesel exhaust fluid usage for
the given distances traveled under various
driving conditions. Usage may vary
depending on:
Driving style.
Towing a trailer.
Vehicle load.
Engine idling time.
117
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Approximate diesel exhaust fluid usage per
tank mi (km)
Driving conditions
11004100 (1,7706,600)Primary trailer tow, aggressive driving
41006500 (6,60010,460)City drive
650010500 (10,46016,900)Steady highway drive
REFUELING
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Do not attempt to refuel using a fuel
pump nozzle that does not fit
through both closing flaps of the
capless fuel filler neck.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have refueled the fuel tank with the
incorrect fuel. This can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
If you use a high pressure spray to wash
your vehicle, only spray the fuel tank filler
door briefly from a distance not less than
8 in (200 mm).
E162791
Note: The front door must be open before
you can open and close the fuel tank filler
door.
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
118
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open. This helps to avoid refueling with the
incorrect fuel.
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B during refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A may affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E162792
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E154765
6. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
remove it slowly.
7. Close the fuel tank filler door.
119
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
E156032
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully
into the fuel system, and leave the
nozzle fully inserted to open both doors
until you are done pumping. Hold
handle higher during insertion for easier
access.
E154765
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly
remove the fuel filler nozzle, allow
about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel
filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel
to drain back into the fuel tank and not
spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank to the point that the fuel is able to
bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled
fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,
a service engine warning lamp may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the
ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the
fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
warning lamp may not reset immediately.
It may take several driving cycles for the
warning lamp to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four
or more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.
120
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty
The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
even when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of
driving (this is your engines break-in
period); a more accurate measurement is
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least 3 to 5 tank fill ups, fill the
fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least 1 month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicles fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.
Conditions
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
Carrying unnecessary weight may
reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400
pounds [180 kilograms] of weight
carried).
Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks) may reduce fuel economy.
Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 810
miles (1216 kilometers) of driving.
Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
121
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
Close windows for high speed driving.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
An incorrectly operating or damaged
exhaust system may result in entry
of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have an authorized dealer inspect
your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if
you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work correctly:
Use only the specified fuel listed.
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information carried out
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company
parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of any of the following warning
lamps, indicators or vehicle symptoms
could indicate that the emission control
system is not working correctly.
Coolant temperature warning lamp.
Charging system warning lamp.
Service engine soon indicator.
Fluid leaks.
Strange odors.
Excessive exhaust smoke.
Loss of engine power.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicles emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please see your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics
system (OBD-II) that monitors the engines
emission control system. This system
protects the environment by making sure
that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists an authorized
dealer in correctly servicing your vehicle.
122
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
The vehicle has run out of fuel.
Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
The engine may misfire or run rough.
The fuel filler door may not have been
closed correctly. See Refueling (page
118).
Driving through deep water. The
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, correctly closing the fuel
filler door or letting the electrical system
dry out. After three driving cycles without
these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should not illuminate. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed
by mixed city or highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, you may need to have
your vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle engine or transmission has
just been serviced or the battery has
recently run out of charge or been
replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate
that your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready
for I/M testing, switch the ignition on for 15
seconds without cranking the engine. If the
service engine soon indicator flashes on
and off eight times, it means that your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the
service engine soon indicator illuminates
and remains on, it means that your vehicle
is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
123
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
If your vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you may need to:
Drive on an expressway or highway for
a steady 15 minutes, followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours without starting the engine.
Then complete the above driving cycle.
The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Do not switch the
ignition off until the above driving cycle is
complete. If your vehicle is still not ready
for I/M testing, you will have to repeat the
above driving cycle.
Diesel Exhaust System: Oxidation
Catalyst And Diesel Particulate
Filter System
Your vehicle is fitted with a diesel
particulate filter. The diesel particulate
filter is an inline filter in the exhaust system
that reduces carbon emissions by trapping
exhaust particles before they reach the
tailpipe. The diesel particulate filter looks
similar to a traditional exhaust catalyst,
except it is larger, and is part of the exhaust
system under the vehicle. The filter couples
to a diesel oxidation catalyst that reduces
the amount of harmful exhaust emitted
from the tailpipe. As soot gathers in the
system it begins to restrict the filter. The
soot that gathers inside the filter is cleaned
in two different ways, passive regeneration
and active regeneration. Both methods
occur automatically and require no actions
from the driver. During either one of these
regeneration methods, you may notice a
change in exhaust tone. At certain times,
the information display will display various
messages related to the diesel particulate
filter.
Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance
Failure to carry out active or operator
commanded regeneration when advised
could result in a clogged diesel particulate
filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills
beyond the regeneration threshold, your
vehicle will disable the ability for active
and operator commanded regeneration.
This could result in irreversible damage to
the diesel particulate filter requiring
replacement that the Ford Warranty may
not cover. If your vehicle is not fitted with
operator commanded regeneration, check
with an authorized dealer for availability.
Passive Regeneration
During passive regeneration, the exhaust
system temperature and constituents
automatically clean the diesel particulate
filter, or reduce the soot level, by oxidizing
the soot. Cleaning occurs naturally during
normal engine operating conditions, at
varying levels depending on driving
conditions.
Active Regeneration
Once the diesel particulate filter is full of
exhaust particles, the engine control
module will command the exhaust system
to clean the diesel particulate filter through
a process called active regeneration. Active
regeneration requires the engine computer
to raise the exhaust temperature to
eliminate the particles. During cleaning,
the particles convert to harmless gasses.
Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter
will then be ready to continue trapping
exhaust particles.
The regeneration process operates more
efficiently when you drive your vehicle at
a steady speed of 30 mph (48 km/h) or
above for approximately 20 minutes to
complete the process. The frequency and
duration of regeneration will fluctuate by
how you drive your vehicle, outside air
temperature, and altitude. For most driving,
124
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
regeneration frequency will vary from
100 mi (160 km) - 310 mi (500 km)
between occurrences and each occurrence
will last between 10 and 20 minutes. You
can usually reduce the duration of
regeneration if you maintain a constant
speed above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When the engine control module detects
that the diesel particulate filter is nearly
full of particulates, and you are not driving
your vehicle in a manner to allow effective
automatic cleaning, the information
display will show the following messages
as a reminder for you to drive in a manner
to clean the diesel particulate filter. If you
drive your vehicle in a manner to allow
effective automatic cleaning, the
information display will show a cleaning
exhaust filter message, which is the normal
regeneration process.
System Messages
Action and DescriptionMessage
You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to
continue to function correctly. Drive in a manner to clean the
diesel particulate filter. Do not disregard a system mainten-
ance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding these
messages.
Exhaust filter overloaded
Drive to clean
You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to
continue to function correctly. Drive in a manner to clean the
diesel particulate filter. Do not disregard a system mainten-
ance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding these
messages.
Exhaust filter at limit
Clean now
You can also choose operator commanded
regeneration to clean the exhaust system
at this point. See the following Operator
Commanded Regeneration.
If you are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic cleaning or you
choose to carry out regeneration of the
diesel particulate filter while the engine is
idling, then operator commanded
regeneration must be carried out.
Operator Commanded Regeneration
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system. Operator commanded
regeneration allows you to manually start
diesel particulate filter cleaning while the
engine is idling. If you are not sure whether
your vehicle is fitted with this feature,
contact an authorized dealer.
125
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
When to Carry Out Operator Commanded
Regeneration
Use the operator commanded
regeneration feature when the following
message appears in the information
display and:
You are not able to drive in a manner
that allows effective automatic
cleaning.
You choose to manually start cleaning
the diesel particulate filter while the
engine is idling.
System Message
Action and DescriptionMessage
You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to
continue to function correctly. Do not disregard a system
maintenance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover
damage caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding
this message.
Exhaust filter overloaded
Drive to clean
Operator Commanded Regeneration
Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position
WARNING
Failure to comply with the following
instructions for operator
commanded regeneration may result
in fire, serious injury, death or property
damage.
Before you start operator commanded
regeneration, do the following:
You must park your vehicle outside of
any structure.
Move the gearshift lever to park (P)
with the parking brake set on stable,
level ground.
Your vehicle must be 9.8 ft (3 m) -
16.4 ft (5 m) away from any
obstructions and must be away from
materials that can easily combust or
melt, for example, paper, leaves,
petroleum products, fuels, plastics and
other dry organic material.
Make sure there is a minimum of 3.2 gal
(12 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.
Make sure all fluids are at the correct
levels.
Make sure that the louvers located at
the tip of the exhaust are clear of any
obstructions as they are used to
introduce fresh air into the tailpipe to
cool the exhaust gas as it leaves.
How to Start Operator Commanded
Regeneration
WARNING
Stay clear of exhaust tip during
regeneration. You or others can be
burned.
Note: You cannot use the operator
commanded regeneration until the diesel
particulate filter load percentage has
reached 100 percent. The diesel particulate
filter load percentage will fluctuate up and
down when driving your vehicle due to active
and passive regenerations.
Note: During the use of operator
commanded regeneration, you may observe
a light amount of white smoke. This is
normal.
126
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
You cannot use the operator
commanded regeneration if the
service engine soon light is
illuminated.
Using the Information Display
You can start operator commanded
regeneration using the information display.
See General Information (page 78).
To start operator commanded regeneration, run the engine at normal operating
temperature and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Exhaust Filter
Full
OK = Cleaning
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button and then follow the prompts regarding
exhaust position as needed to initiate operator commanded
regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are
not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an
authorized dealer. The display will confirm the operation has
started and when it has finished.
Exhaust Filter
Full
Press the OK button and then follow the prompts regarding
exhaust position as needed to initiate operator commanded
regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are
not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an
authorized dealer. The display will confirm the operation has
started and when it has finished.
Exhaust Filter
Overloaded
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at saturation, a message requesting
permission to initiate filter cleaning will display.
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button and then follow the prompts regarding
exhaust position as needed to initiate operator commanded
regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are
not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an
authorized dealer. The display will confirm the operation has
started and when it has finished.
Exhaust Filter
At Limit
127
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Once operator commanded regeneration
starts, engine rpm will rise to
approximately 2,000 - 2,500 rpm and the
cooling fan will increase speed; you will
hear a change in audible sound due to the
fan and engine speed increase.
It is not necessary to open the hood on the
engine compartment. Once operator
commanded regeneration is complete, the
engine rpm and fan will return to normal
idling. The exhaust system will remain very
hot for several minutes even after
regeneration is complete. Do not reposition
the vehicle over materials that could burn
until the exhaust system has had sufficient
time to cool. Depending on the amount of
soot collected by the diesel particulate
filter, ambient temperature, and altitude,
operator commanded regeneration may
last up to 30 minutes.
When the system is at the point
of over saturation, the service
engine soon light will illuminate
and the following message will appear.
System Message
Action and DescriptionMessage
You will not be able to allow cleaning. You must have your
vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Exhaust filter over limit
Service now
Operator Commanded Regeneration
with Automatic Regeneration Control
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system. You can switch off automatic
regeneration until better driving conditions
are available, for example steady high
driving. You can then switch automatic
regeneration back on to clean the diesel
particulate filter.
Switching the Automatic Regeneration Control On and Off
To switch the automatic regeneration control on and off, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Information
Press the OK button.Driver Assist
Uncheck the box to switch automatic regeneration off.Auto Exh.Clean
Check the box to switch automatic regeneration on.
When you switch automatic regeneration off, one of the following warning
messages may be displayed.
128
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Action and DescriptionMessage
The diesel particulate filter is full and you should switch the
automatic regeneration control on as soon as possible.
Exhaust Filter Full Clean
Soon
The diesel particulate filter is overloaded you must switch
the automatic regeneration control on as soon as possible.
Exhaust Filter Over-
loaded Clean Now
You must clean the diesel particulate filter immediately.
Failing to do so would cause the diesel particulate filter to
become blocked.
Exhaust filter at limit
Clean now
How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator
Commanded Regeneration
If you need to cancel the operator
commanded regeneration, press the brake
pedal or switch the ignition off to stop the
procedure. Depending on the amount of
time you allowed the operator
commanded regeneration to operate, soot
may not have had sufficient time to be
eliminated, but the exhaust system and
exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut
your vehicle off during operator
commanded regeneration, you will notice
turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence
caused by shutting off a diesel engine
during boosted operation and is considered
normal.
Filter Service and Maintenance
Over time, a slight amount of ash will build
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be removed
for ash cleaning at approximately
119900 mi (193,000 km) or greater, actual
mileage can vary greatly depending upon
engine and vehicle operating conditions.
The filter may need to be replaced at
approximately 248500 mi (400,000 km)
depending upon vehicle operating
conditions.
In both cases, the engine control system
will set a service light to inform you to have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
If there are any issues with the diesel
particulate filter, the engine control system
will turn on a service light to inform you to
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
Powertrain fault indicator.
Service engine soon indicator.
Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Failure to maintain the functional
holes, in the tailpipe section of the
exhaust, clean and free of debris or
foreign material may result in the holes
becoming blocked or plugged. Do not
modify or remove the tail-pipe section.
Blocked or plugged holes or
removal/modification of the system could
result in elevated exhaust gas
temperatures which may result in
vehicle/property damage or personal
injury.
129
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter and/or the diesel
particulate filter (DPF). The diesel
oxidation catalytic converter and/or the
DPF heats up to a high temperature after
only a short period of engine operation and
can stay hot even after the engine is turned
off. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
Note: Additions of aftermarket devices or
modifications to the exhaust system can
reduce the effectiveness of the exhaust
system as well as cause damage to the
exhaust system or engine. These actions
may also affect your vehicles warranty. See
the Warranty Guide for more information.
The diesel resonator tail-pipe assembly is
a uniquely functioning device that
accompanies the diesel particulate filter
assembly. The tail-pipe assembly serves
multiple functions. First, it serves as an
acoustic device to attenuate exhaust noise.
Second, it provides an exit path for the
exhaust from your vehicle. It also helps
control the temperature of the exhaust
during diesel particulate filter regeneration
events. The visible holes in each leg of the
twin tip and the holes under the shield just
inboard of the right rear tire(s) are
functional. You need to keep the holes
clear of mud, debris or foreign material to
maintain proper function of the exhaust
system. Clean and remove debris or foreign
material if present as needed. Spraying
with a hose during regular washing of your
vehicle should help keep holes clean and
clear of debris or foreign material.
Emission Control System Laws
WARNING
Do not remove or alter the original
equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal
floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Provide adequate insulation. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.
In the U.S. federal law and certain state
laws prohibit removing or rendering
inoperative emission control system(s).
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. Ford recommends
against any vehicle modification without
determining applicable law.
Tampering with emissions
control systems (including
related sensors and the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system) can
result in reduced engine power and the
illumination of the service engine soon
light.
130
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal law prohibits the following acts:
The removal or rendering inoperative
by any person other than for purposes
of maintenance, repair or replacement
of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for
the purpose of noise control prior to its
sale or delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or while it is in use
The use of the vehicle after such device
or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturers
specifications.
The complexity of the diesel engine makes
it so you are not encouraged to carry-out
maintenance other than the services
described in this Owner's Manual.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
A plugged engine air filter element.
Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
A clogged fuel filter.
Contaminated fuel.
Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
An open or pinched sensor hose.
Incorrect engine oil level.
Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lbs. (4,536
kg) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).
The preceding statements concerning
prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lbs. (4,536 kg) GVWR.
131
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure you shift the gearshift
lever to park (P). Switch the ignition
off and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Gearshift Lever
Positions of the Automatic
Transmission
E175317
Tow/Haul buttonT/H
ParkP
ReverseR
NeutralN
DriveD
Manual shiftingM
Manual upshift+
Manual downshift-
Tow/Haul (T/H) (If Equipped)
Tow/Haul delays transmission upshift to
reduce the frequency of transmission
shifting.
The system provides engine braking in all
forward gears when the gearshift lever is
in drive (D). Engine braking helps you to
slow and control your vehicle when
descending a grade.
Depending on trailer load and driving
conditions, the transmission may
downshift when descending a grade.
Downshifting will depend on the amount
of vehicle braking applied.
Switching Tow/Haul On and Off
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever
once. The TOW HAUL indicator
light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
To deactivate the tow haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever twice. The
tow haul indicator lamp will deactivate.
Tow haul will also deactivate when you
power down your vehicle.
Park (P)
WARNINGS
Do not shift the gearshift lever to
park (P) when your vehicle is moving.
This can cause damage to the
transmission not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in a crash or
serious injury.
132
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Transmission
WARNINGS
Apply the parking brake, shift the
gearshift lever to park (P) and switch
the ignition off before leaving your
vehicle. Make sure that the gearshift lever
fully latches into position.
When the gearshift lever is in this position,
it will lock the transmission. The engine
does not transmit power to the driven
wheels. You can start the engine with the
gearshift lever in this position.
Note: A warning tone will sound if you open
the driver door and you have not shifted the
gearshift lever to park (P).
Reverse (R)
WARNINGS
Do not shift the gearshift lever to
reverse (R) when your vehicle is
moving. This can cause damage to
the transmission not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in a crash or
serious injury.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting the gearshift lever out
of reverse (R).
Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) to
allow your vehicle to move backward.
Neutral (N)
When the gearshift lever is in this position,
the transmission does not lock. The engine
does not transmit power to the driven
wheels. You can start the engine with the
gearshift lever in this position.
Drive (D)
Shift the gearshift lever to drive (D) to
allow your vehicle to move forward and
shift automatically through the forward
gears.
The transmission shifts to the appropriate
gear for optimum performance based on
ambient temperature, road gradient,
vehicle load and your input.
Note: A shift will occur only when your
vehicle speed and the engine speed are
appropriate.
Note: You can temporarily override the
selected gear by pressing the + or - buttons
on the side of the gearshift lever.
Manual (M)
WARNING
Do not hold the + or - buttons
permanently in.
Shift the gearshift lever to manual (M) to
allow your vehicle to move forward and
allow you to shift manually through the
forward gears. Press the + or - buttons on
the side of the gearshift lever to shift
manually through the forward gears. The
instrument cluster will display the selected
gear, and a shift indicator arrow to assist
optimum shifting.
Press the + button to upshift.
Press the - button to downshift.
You can skip gears by pressing a button
repeatedly at short intervals.
Upshift at the recommended shift
speeds according to the following
chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
Vehicle speed mph
( km/h):
Upshift from:
15 (24)1 - 2
25 (40)2 - 3
40 (64)3 - 4
133
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
Vehicle speed mph
( km/h):
Upshift from:
45 (72)4 - 5
50 (80)5 - 6
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain an excessive engine speed without
shifting.
Hints on Driving with an Automatic
Transmission
WARNING
Do not idle the engine for long
periods in drive (D) with the brakes
applied.
Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
1. Start the engine.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Shift the gearshift lever to drive (D),
reverse (R) or manual (M).
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Release the brake pedal and press the
accelerator pedal.
Stopping Your Vehicle
1. Release the accelerator pedal and
press the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the gearshift lever to neutral (N)
or park (P).
4. Switch the ignition off.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, shift
between drive (D) and reverse (R) pressing
lightly on the accelerator pedal in each
gear. Stop between shifts in a steady
pattern to rock your vehicle.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
or tires may occur and the engine may
overheat.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
This procedure requires you to shift
the gearshift lever out of park (P)
causing your vehicle to roll. Make
sure you fully set the parking brake before
attempting to shift the gearshift lever out
of park (P).
If you release the parking brake and
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working correctly. The system has
detected a fault that requires service.
Your vehicle has a brake-shift interlock
feature. This prevents you from shifting the
gearshift lever from the park (P) position,
unless the brake pedal is pressed.
In the event of an electrical malfunction,
or if the vehicle battery has run out of
charge, use the following procedure to shift
the gearshift lever from the park (P)
position.
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
134
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Transmission
E182198
2. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
housing cover.
E182199
3
3. Locate the white lever, situated on the
left hand side of the gearshift lever.
E174827
4. Move the white lever toward the rear
of your vehicle.
5. Shift the gearshift lever out of park (P)
and into neutral (N).
6. Replace the gearshift lever housing
cover, apply the brake pedal, switch
the ignition on and release the parking
brake.
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
135
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Transmission
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 230).
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 74).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the gearshift lever to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
If the system is disabled, normal
braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates
when you release the parking brake, have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
You take corners too fast.
The road surface is poor.
136
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
Center Parking Brake
E172225
To apply the parking brake:
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its
fullest extent.
To release the parking brake:
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly.
3. Press the release button and push the
parking brake lever down.
Note: If you park your vehicle facing uphill
turn the steering wheel away from the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle facing
downhill turn the steering wheel toward the
curb.
Note: Do not press the release button while
pulling the parking brake lever up.
137
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations, for example stuck in
snow or mud, it may be beneficial for you
to switch the traction control system off.
This allows the wheels to spin with full
engine power.
Note: A MyKey can be set up to prevent the
MyKey user from switching the traction
control system off. See MyKey (page
46).
E179110
Press the traction control button located
on the instrument panel. It illuminates
when you switch the system off.
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Traction
control system
Electronic
stability
control
Roll stability
control
Electronic
stability
control off
warning lamp
Button func-
tions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at
engine start-up
Disabled1
EnabledEnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
momentarily
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed
again after
deactivation
1Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled.
Single-wheel spin traction control is always enabled.
138
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Traction Control
WARNING
If a malfunction occurs within the
AdvanceTrac system, the traction
control off lamp will illuminate. Make
sure the traction control system was not
manually switched off using the traction
control button. If the traction control lamp
stays on, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer immediately. Operating
your vehicle with traction control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
E138639
The traction control lamp
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition turns the traction
control system on.
The traction control off lamp
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off, or if a malfunction occurs in
the traction control system.
139
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the AdvanceTrac
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.
Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker
as far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats in
order to minimize the risk of interfering with
the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. Its always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
AdvanceTrac system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operators ability to control the
vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac
system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability
Control system helps you keep control of
your vehicle when on a slippery surface.
The electronic stability control portion of
the system helps avoid skids and lateral
slides and roll stability control helps avoid
a vehicle rollover. The traction control
system helps avoid drive wheel spin and
loss of traction. See Using Traction
Control (page 138).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
with RSC skidding off its
intended route.
A
Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with
RSC maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
B
140
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Stability Control
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control (RSC®)
The system automatically activates when
you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac
with RSC system cannot be completely
turned off, but the electronic stability
control and roll stability control portions
of the system are disabled when the
transmission is in position R. You can turn
off the traction control portion of the
system independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 138).
141
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
If your vehicles has a non-Ford
approved trailer tow module the
system may not correctly detect
objects.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves.
The system does not detect objects
that are moving away from your
vehicle. They will only be detected
shortly after they start to move toward
your vehicle.
Take particular care when reversing
with a tow ball arm or a rear fitted
accessory. For example, a bicycle
carrier. The rear parking aid will only
indicate the approximate distance from
the rear bumper to an object.
If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the
sensors briefly from a distance not
less than eight inches (20 centimeters).
Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm,
switch the system off when you connect
trailer lamps (or lighting boards) to the
13-pin socket through a Ford approved
trailer tow module.
Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
or snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
Note: The system may emit false alerts if
it detects a signal using the same frequency
as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully
loaded.
Note: The outer sensors may detect the
side walls of a garage. If the distance
between the outer sensors and the side wall
remains constant for three seconds, the
alert will turn off. As you continue the inner
sensors will detect objects directly behind
your vehicle.
PARKING AID
WARNINGS
The parking aid system can only
assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking aid
system.
Traffic control systems, inclement
weather, air brakes, external motors
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The system may not detect small or
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
The system warns you of objects that are
within the detection zone of the bumper
areas. When you switch the ignition on,
the system automatically turns on. The
system becomes active when you shift into
reverse (R) and the speed of your vehicle
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
142
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
E130178
Rear detection zone: Up to 72 in
(183 cm) from the rear bumper.
A
Note: Accessories that block the detection
zone of the system may create false alerts.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this will
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
A tone will sound in the following manner
when objects are near the rear bumper:
Objects detected by the rear sensors
produce a low-pitched tone.
An alert will only sound for three
seconds if an object is further than 10 in
(25 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
The system detects objects when you shift
into reverse (R) and:
Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching your vehicle at a speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less, and an object
is approaching your vehicle at a speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: The rate of the tone increases as your
vehicle moves closer to an object.
When the parking aid system sounds a
tone, the audio system may reduce the set
volume. When the warning ends, the audio
system returns to the previously set
volume.
Note: Volume reduction is not a standard
feature of all audio systems.
Switching the Parking Aid System
Off
E177143
Press the button to switch the system off.
The system remains off until you switch
the ignition off. The button is located on
the instrument panel.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
Objects in the display are closer than
they appear.
143
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The operation of the camera may
vary depending on the ambient
temperature, vehicle and road
conditions.
Do not place objects in front of the
camera.
The camera may not detect objects
that are very close to your vehicle.
E170301
The camera is on the rear cargo door.
Switching the Rear View Camera
On
Switch the ignition on and shift into reverse
(R). The image will display in the interior
mirror or in the information and
entertainment display.
The camera may not operate correctly in
any of the following conditions:
Dark areas.
Intense light areas.
If there is a sudden change to the
ambient temperature.
If the camera is wet.
If the camera is dirty.
If the camera is obstructed.
Using the Display
WARNING
Objects above the camera may not
be visible. Check the area behind
your vehicle when necessary.
The lines show a projected vehicle path
and the approximate distance from the
rear bumper to an object.
Distance markers are only a guide and are
calculated for unloaded vehicles on an
even road surface.
144
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
E142132
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
Red - up to 12 inches (0.3 meter).A
Amber - 12 inches to 24 inches
(0.3 meter to 0.6 meter).
B
Green - 24 inches to 35 inches
(0.6 meter to 0.9 meter).
C
Black - center line of the
projected vehicle path.
D
Note: The green line is extended from 35 in
(0.9 m) up to a distance of 126 in (3.2 m).
Note: When reversing with a trailer the
camera will show the direction of your
vehicle and not the direction of the trailer.
Note: When reversing with a trailer the
screen does not display the lines.
Switching the Rear View Camera
Off
Move the gearshift lever from reverse (R).
Note: The system will automatically switch
once your vehicle speed has reached
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or after a
short period of time.
Vehicles with Parking Aid
The display will show a colored distance
bar. This indicates the approximate
distance from the rear bumper to an
object.
These are color coded as follows:
Red - up to 12 in (0.3 m).
Amber - 12 in (0.3 m) to 24 in (0.6 m).
Green - 24 in (0.6 m) to 71 in (1.8 m).
145
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
Cruise control allows you to control your
speed using the switches on the steering
wheel. You can use cruise control when
you exceed approximately 20 mph (30
km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on winding roads or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes. Change down a gear to
assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below your set speed while
driving uphill.
E142437
The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator will display in the
instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed
Pull CAN toward you and release, or tap
the brake pedal. The set speed will not be
erased.
146
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Cruise Control
Resuming the Set Speed
Pull RES toward you and release.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the
ignition off.
147
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Cruise Control
SPEED LIMITER
Engine Speed Limiter
Engine speed is limited to protect the
engine.
Vehicle Speed Limiter - Fixed
The system prevents you from driving
faster than a programmed speed.
DRIVER ALERT
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
Take regular rest breaks as required
and do not wait for the system to
warn you if you feel tired.
Take rest breaks only where it is safe
to do so.
Certain driving styles and behavior
may result in the system issuing a
warning even if you are not feeling
tired.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow, spray and large
contrasts in lighting can all influence the
sensor.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
WARNINGS
The system may not operate in areas
during roadwork construction.
The system may not operate on
roads with sharp bends or narrow
lanes.
Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding
the sensor.
If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may
not function correctly.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
Note: The system assists you when driving
on fast main roads and freeways.
Note: The system calculates an alertness
level at vehicle speeds above approximately
40 mph (65 km/h).
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior.
The system is designed to alert you if it
detects that you are becoming drowsy or
if your driving deteriorates.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system will remain on or off
depending on how it was last set.
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
78).
The system will calculate your alertness
level based upon your driving behavior in
relation to the lane markings and other
factors.
148
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Driving Aids
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
The warning system has two stages:
1. A temporary warning is issued to advise
you to take a rest. This message only
appears for a short time.
2. If you do not rest and the system
continues to detect that your driving
deteriorates, it will issue a further
warning. This will remain in the
information display until you cancel it.
See Information Messages (page
83).
Press OK on the steering wheel control to
remove the warning.
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue warnings if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 78).
The alertness level is shown by six steps
as a colored bar.
E131358
Alertness level is fine, no rest required.
E131359
Alertness level is critical, indicating that
you should take a rest as soon as it is safe
to do so.
The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow and
then finally red when a rest break must be
taken.
Green: No rest required.
Yellow: First (temporary) warning.
Red: Second warning.
Your alertness level will be shown in grey
if:
the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings
your vehicle speed drops below
approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by:
switching the ignition off and on
stopping your vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver's door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
Lane Keeping Alert
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
149
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
The sensor may incorrectly track lane
markings such as other structures or
objects. This can result in a false or
missed warning.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow, spray and large
contrasts in lighting can all influence the
sensor.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The system may not operate in areas
during roadwork construction.
The system may not operate on
roads with sharp bends or narrow
lanes.
Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding
the sensor.
If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may
not function correctly.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
Note: The system may assist you when
driving on fast main roads and freeways.
Note: The system may not operate during
hard braking or acceleration and when you
are intentionally steering your vehicle.
Note: The system will operate with a
minimum of one tracked lane marking.
Note: The system will only operate above
vehicle speeds of approximately 40 mph
(65 km/h).
The sensor is located behind the interior
mirror. It continuously monitors conditions
to alert you of unintentional lane drifting
at high speeds.
The system will automatically detect and
track the lane markings on the road. If your
vehicle unintentionally drifts toward the
road lane markings, you will see a warning
in the information display. There is also a
warning given in the form of a vibration felt
through the steering wheel.
Note: The vibration intensity from the
steering wheel may decease depending on
the quality of the road surface.
Using Lane Keeping Alert
Switching the System On and Off
E132099
Turn the system on and off using the
button on the direction indicator stalk.
Press the button twice to turn the system
on. Press the button once to turn the
system off.
Note: When you switch the system off, a
warning indicator will remain illuminated in
the information display. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 74).
Note: The system status and settings will
remain unchanged when you switch the
ignition on and off.
Setting the Steering Wheel Vibration
Level
The system has three intensity levels which
you can set using the information display.
See (page 78).
150
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Driving Aids
Setting the System Sensitivity
You can adjust how quickly the system
warns you of a dangerous situation. The
system has two sensitivity levels which you
can set using the information display. See
(page 78).
System Warnings
E152382
A column of lane markings are displayed
either side of the vehicle graphic.
The lane markings are color coded as
follows:
Green: The system is ready to warn you
of any unintentional lane departure.
Red: Your vehicle is approaching or is
too close to the detected lane
boundary. Take immediate safe action
to reposition your vehicle.
Gray: The system will suppress the
relevant lane boundary.
Instances where a lane boundary may be
suppressed:
The sensor may not detect the lane
markings on the road.
You turn the direction indicator for that
side of your vehicle on.
If you apply direct steering, accelerate
fast or brake hard.
Your vehicle speed is outside the
operating limits.
If there is an anti-lock brake or stability
control intervention.
Narrow lane width.
If the lane markings in the display turn red
or you feel a vibration through the steering
wheel you must take immediate and safe
action to align your vehicle. Correct any
unintended lane drift immediately.
151
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Driving Aids
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES
Securing Cargo
E175810
Maximum Load
Value
Variant
1125 lb (510 kg)All
Note: The number of load retaining fixtures
may vary depending on your vehicle model.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicles weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicles Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
152
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb. for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or
authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E142516
153
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
E142517
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
154
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Example only:
E142523
155
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
E142524
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
E143819
GCW GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicles braking system is rated
156
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
1015% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 1525% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicles GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicles placard.
157
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the XXX amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
158
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.
159
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
specified on the certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, for example fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 186).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading your vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
Select a tow bar with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
correct trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
Owner's Manual. See Load Limit
(page 152). You can also find the
information in the RV & Trailer
Towing Guide. See an authorized
dealer.
160
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Switching off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. We
do not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental, for example
ascending a grade, and the driver has
significant trailer towing experience and
can control trailer sway to maintain safe
operation.
This feature applies your vehicle's brakes
at individual wheels and, if necessary,
reduces engine power. If the trailer begins
to sway, the stability control light flashes
and a message appears in the information
display.
ActionMessage
Slow your vehicle down,
then pull safely to the side
of the road and check for
correct tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See
Load Carrying (page 152).
Trailer
sway
Reduce
speed
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may turn on multiple times
to gradually reduce vehicle speed.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Vehicles equipped with the Trailer
Tow Package or the Heavy Duty
Payload Package should not
exceed 55 ft² (5.1 m²) trailer frontal
area.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 ft (300 m) starting
at the 1000 ft (300 m) elevation
point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following charts.
161
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
Van and Chassis Cab
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight*
Maximum GCWRAxle
Ratio
Powertrain
4750 lb (2155 kg)10600 lb (4808 kg)3.313.2L Power
Stroke Diesel
7500 lb (3402 kg)13500 lb (6123 kg)3.733.2L Power
Stroke Diesel
5700 lb (2585 kg)11200 lb (5080 kg)3.313.5L V6 GTDI
7150 lb (3243 kg)12600 lb (5715 kg)3.733.5L V6 GTDI
5350 lb (2427 kg)10800 lb (4899 kg)3.733.7L V6 TiVCT
6700 lb (3039 kg)12000 lb (5450 kg)4.103.7L V6 TiVCT
*Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
Wagon
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight*
Maximum GCWRAxle
Ratio
Powertrain
4200 lb (1905 kg)10600 lb (4808 kg)3.313.2L Power
Stroke Diesel
4650 lb (2109 kg)11200 lb (5080 kg)3.733.2L Power
Stroke Diesel
5150 lb (2336 kg)11200 lb (5080 kg)3.313.5L V6 GTDI
4800 lb (2177 kg)10800 lb (4899 kg)3.733.7L V6 TiVCT
5200 lb (2359 kg)11200 lb (5080 kg)4.103.7L V6 TiVCT
*Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
162
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
Calculating the Maximum
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
previous charts.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
Vehicle curb weight
Hitch hardware weight, such as
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware
Driver weight
Passenger(s) weight
Payload, cargo and luggage
weight
Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle
has covered at least 1000 mi
(1,600 km). See Breaking-In (page
172).
Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the correct
installation and adjustment
specifications.
Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).
If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
For load specification terms found on the
tire label, Safety Compliance label and
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
maximum load. See Load Limit (page
152).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped)
E163167
Your vehicle is fitted with both a 7 pin and
4 pin trailer wiring connector.
163
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a correctly fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the correct wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and brake
lamp.
Yellow
Ground (-).White
Electric brakes.Blue
Right turn signal and brake
lamp.
Green
Battery (+).Orange
Running lamps.Brown
Reverse lamps.Grey
Tow Hitch
Do not use a tow hitch that either clamps
on to the bumper or attaches to the axle.
You must distribute the load in your trailer
so that between 10% and 15% of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight Distributing Hitches
A weight distribution hitch is not
recommended for use with your vehicle.
Safety Chains
WARNING
Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
frame or hook retainers of your vehicle's
tow hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect trailer hydraulic
brake systems directly to the vehicle
brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your
chances of having a crash greatly increase.
Electric, manual, automatic or surge-type
trailer brakes are safe if you install them
correctly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. Trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
WARNING
The Ford trailer brake controller has
been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric-actuated
drum brakes (one to four axles) and
electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not
turn on the hydraulic surge-style trailer
brakes. It is the responsibility of the
customer to make sure that the trailer
brakes are adjusted appropriately,
functioning normally and all electric
connections are correctly made. Failure to
do so may result in loss of vehicle control,
crash or serious injury.
164
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
E166403
A
B
Manual control lever.A
Gain adjustment buttons.B
When used correctly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailers
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicles brake pressure
Slide the manual control lever to the left
to turn on the trailer's electric brakes. They
work independently of the tow vehicle's
braking system. See the following;
Procedure for adjusting the gain
setting for instructions on correct use of
this feature. If you use the manual control
while the brake is also applied, the greater
of the two inputs determines the power
sent to the trailer brakes.
1. Press the + and - buttons to adjust the
brake controller's power output to the
trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You
can increase the gain setting to 10
(maximum trailer braking) or decrease
it to zero (no trailer braking). Pressing
and holding a button raises or lowers
the setting continuously.
The gain setting displays in the
information display as:
Message
Trailer Brake
Gain:
Note: Using the manual control lever
illuminates the trailer's brake lamps and
your vehicle's brake lamps, except the
center high-mounted brake lamp, if you
make the correct electrical connection to
the trailer.
165
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph and the trailer connectivity
status in the information display as follows:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Displays the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain setting. This also displays if you
use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
Trailer Brake
Gain:
No Trailer
Displays when you press your vehicle's brake pedal, or upon
use of the manual control lever. Bar indicators illuminate in
the information display to indicate the amount of power going
to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual
control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.
Trailer Brake
Gain:
Output:
Displays when the system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection during a given ignition cycle. For example a trailer
with electric trailer brakes.
Trailer Connected
Displays when the system senses a trailer connection and
then a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle, this is accompanied by a single
audible tone. It also displays if a vehicle or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This
message can also display if you use the manual control lever
without a trailer connected.
Trailer Disconnected
Procedure for Adjusting the Gain Setting
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: Only carry out this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and correctly adjusted. See a trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. Use the gain adjustment + and -
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of six is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
4. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and slide
the manual control lever completely.
166
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
5. If the trailer wheels lock, indicated by
squealing tires, reduce the gain setting.
If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase
the gain setting. Repeat steps four and
five until the gain setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lock. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock may
not be attainable even with the
maximum gain setting of 10.
System Warning Messages
Action and DescriptionMessage
Displays in response to faults sensed by the trailer brake
controller, accompanied by a single tone. If this message
appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.
Trailer Brake Module
Fault
Displays when there is a short circuit on the electric brake
output wire. If the message displays, accompanied by a single
tone, with no trailer connected, the problem is with your
vehicle wiring between the trailer brake controller and the 7-
pin connector. If the message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer wiring. Consult a
trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to ground,
for example a chaffed wire, short to voltage, for example a
pulled pin on trailer emergency breakaway battery or the
trailer brakes may be drawing too much current.
Wiring Fault on Trailer
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly
which trailer fault has occurred. However, the Ford Warranty does not cover this diagnosis
if the fault is with the trailer.
Points to Remember
Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit
may result.
Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
Only use the manual control lever for
correct adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
167
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
The trailer brake controller is fitted with
a feature that reduces output at vehicle
speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so
trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brake system whether you
attach a trailer or not.
When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in correct trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lamps,
brake lamps, turn signals and hazard
warning lamps are working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) until you drive your vehicle
at least 495 mi (800 km). See
Breaking-In (page 172).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check the tow hitch, electrical
connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled
50 mi (80 km).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position park (P) to aid
engine and transmission cooling and
to help A/C performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or on hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If the transmission is fitted with a
Grade Assist, Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
168
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
If your vehicle is fitted with
AdvanceTrac with roll stability control
(RSC), this system may turn on during
typical cornering maneuvers with a
heavily loaded trailer. This is normal.
Turning the corner at a slower speed
while towing may reduce this tendency.
If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your vehicle's rear axle with
synthetic gear lubricant (if the axle is
not already filled with it). See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).
Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
Turn the steering wheel to point
your vehicle tires away from traffic
flow.
Set your vehicle parking brake.
Place the automatic transmission
in position park (P).
Place wheel chocks in front of and
at the back of the trailer wheels.
(trailer wheel chocks are not
included with your vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Water Craft (PWC)
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after the trailer is removed from the water.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
Causing internal damage to the
components.
Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
169
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. However, it is acceptable to
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle
configuration, you perform the following
before towing.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle is disabled and you have no
access to a tow dolly, car-hauling trailer or
a flatbed transport vehicle, it can only be
flat-towed with all wheels on the ground
under the following conditions:
Your vehicle is facing forward so that
it is towed in a forward direction.
The transmission selector lever is
placed in position N. If the transmission
gear shift lever cannot be moved to
position N, it may need to be
overridden. See Automatic
Transmission (page 132).
Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
Drive off slowly and smoothly without
jerking the vehicle that is being towed.
Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be
placed on the same side. For example; right
hand rear towing point to right hand front
towing point.
You must use a tow rope or rigid towing
bar that is of the correct strength for the
weight of the towing vehicle and the
vehicle that is being towed.
Note: Using a rigid towing bar is the safest
way to tow a vehicle.
The weight of the vehicle that is being
towed must not exceed the weight of the
towing vehicle.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Follow these guidelines to prevent damage
to your vehicles transmission if you have
a need for recreational vehicle towing. For
example; towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome.
170
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
Your vehicle cannot be flat-towed with all
wheels on the ground beyond the limits
set out above as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. See Emergency
Towing. You must place your vehicle on
a car-hauling trailer, or place the front
wheels of your vehicle on a tow dolly. If you
are using a tow dolly, follow the
instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
Note: Put your vehicle's climate control
system in recirculated air mode to prevent
exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle.
See Climate Control (page 88).
171
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics. The engine also needs to
break in. Avoid hard accelerations and
driving too fast for the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). If possible, avoid
carrying heavy loads up steep grades
during the break-in period.
REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and cause the
engine to shut down completely.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges
(page 72).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine will continue to operate
with limited power for a short time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.
The air conditioning will switch off and the
engine cooling fan will operate continually.
1. Reduce your speed gradually and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Switch the engine off immediately to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 206).
5. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
Drive at steady speeds.
Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling
at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15%
less fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121
kph).
Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
Use the recommended engine oil.
Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
Avoid long idle periods.
Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
172
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Driving Hints
Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4
kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400
lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
173
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
174
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
24 hours a day, seven days a week.
For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
Battery jump start.
Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
Fuel delivery independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
Winch out available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
Towing independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete
the roadside assistance identification card
found in the centerfold of your warranty
guide and retain for future reference.
175
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you
require more information, please refer to
the coverage section of your warranty
guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered
services in Canada or the continental
United States. Coverage extends to
vehicles that use public, non-seasonal,
annually traveled roadways. Roadside
Assistance coverage does not extend to
vehicles involved in cross-country driving,
logging, autocross and any other form of
off-road use. Well maintained roads and
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
supplier, and allow their representatives
to perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to
the dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm
if you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.
Call the Ford Roadside Assistance at
1-800-665-2006 for additional
information.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
E71943
The hazard warning button is located on
the instrument panel. Switch the hazard
warning flashers on when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard.
Press the button to switch the hazard
warning flashers on. The front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again to switch the
hazard warning flashers off.
Note: Prolonged use of the hazard warning
flashers will cause the battery to run out of
charge. There may be insufficient power to
restart the engine.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
176
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a
vehicle with an automatic transmission may
cause transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch, and switch off
all accessories.
Your vehicle has a positive (+) access
terminal and a negative (-) grounding
connection point that you can access
under the hood, even though the actual
battery is under the driver seat. You can
jump your vehicle using these points.
The positive (+) access terminal is next to
the fuse box, under a red cap. To access
the positive (+) terminal, lift the red cap
up.
E145290
The negative (-) terminal is a post, located
on the driver side, near the hood hinge. It
is a grounding connection point, so you will
need to remove the rubber covering first.
E183998
177
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) access terminal of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to the grounding
connection point of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
rpms, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
178
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
grounding connection point of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) access terminal of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
After you start the disabled vehicle and
remove the jumper cables, allow your
vehicle to idle for several minutes so the
battery can recharge.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the turn signal lamps
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
You press the hazard control button.
You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
Your vehicle runs out of power.
179
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
Owner Manuals.
Maintenance Schedules.
Recalls.
Ford Extended Service Plans.
Ford Genuine Accessories.
Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
180
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Customer Assistance
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
Vehicle Identification Number.
Your telephone number (home and
business).
The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
The vehicles current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies
under your states warranty laws. Ford is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute
must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
before taking action under the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the
extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicles
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
181
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
182
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrators award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
183
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealerships Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owners
Manual
French Owners Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
184
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
18003330510Phone
185
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
E146726
For item location: See Under Hood
Overview (page 201).
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
E152513
This is located behind the removable trim
panel.
Pre-fuse Box
This is located under the driver's seat.
Body Control Module Fuse Box
E152512
This is located behind the removable trim
panel.
186
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
E148826
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.10AF1
Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.15AF2
Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.15AF3
Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.10AF4
187
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Diesel particulate filter vaporizer.
3AF5 Glow plug monitor.
Anti-lock brake system.
3AF6 Stability assist.
Ignition.
Powertrain control module.7.5AF7
Cooling fan - Gasoline.20AF8
Left-hand windshield wiper.30AF9
Right-hand windshield wiper.30AF10
Air conditioning clutch.10AF11
Diesel particulate filter vaporizer glow plug.20AF12
Not used.-F13
Selective Catalytic Reduction - ignition - Diesel.3AF14
Not used.-F15
Not used.-F16
Not used.-F17
Anti-lock brake system.
40AF18 Stability assist pump.
Starter solenoid.30AF19
Glow plugs.60AF20
Ignition relay 3.60AF21
Selective Catalytic Reduction relay feed.40AF22
Electric vacuum pump relay feed.40AF22
PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE.10AF23
Fuel injection pump - Diesel.10AF24
Fuel injection pump - Gasoline.20AF24
Throttle control unit - Diesel.15AF25
PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE - Gasoline.10AF25
188
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE.20AF26
Not used.-F27
Crankcase sensor - Diesel.7.5AF28
Injection power - Gasoline 3.7L.10AF28
Ignition feed - Audio - Gasoline.3AF29
Crank case ventilation heater Diesel.7.5AF29
Single cooling fan.60AF30
Twin cooling fan.40AF30
Twin cooling fan 2 - Gasoline.40AF31
Windshield wiper motor.30AF32
Windshield dual wiper motors.60AF32
Start-Stop auxiliary water pump.20AF33
Not used.-F34
Powertrain control system supply - Gasoline.20AF35
Powertrain control system supply - Diesel.15AF35
Mass air flow sensor - Gasoline.20AF36
Mass air flow sensor .
15AF36 NOX sensor 1, 2 - Diesel.
Volume Control Valve.7.5AF37
Air conditioning clutch - Gasoline.20AF38
Air conditioning clutch - Diesel.7.5AF38
UEGO, VAP PUMP, EBYPASS, EDF, HEDF - Gasoline.10AF39
UEGO, VAP PUMP, EBYPASS, EDF, HEDF - Diesel.15AF39
189
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Ignition 3.R1
Not used.R2
Not used.R3
Not used.R4
Cooling fan - Gasoline.R5
Windshield wiper - on and off.R6
Windshield wiper - low and high speed.R7
Electrical Vacuum Pump - Gasoline.R8
Starter motor.R9
Air conditioning clutch.R10
Fuel vaporizer system glow plug.R11
Fuel injection pump.R12
Not used.R13
Not used.R14
Low-speed and high-speed cooling fan.R15
Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.R16
Powertrain control module.R17
High speed cooling fan.R18
190
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
E148827
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Airbag module.10AF1
Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability
control.4AF2
Parking brake.
Not used.-F3
Trailer tow back-up lamp relay.10AF4
Cutaway body connectors.20AF5
Not used.-F6
Not used.-F7
AC power outlet socket.40AF8
Trailer brake module.30AF9
Driver power seat.30AF10
Passenger power seat.30AF11
Trailer tow park lamp relay.30AF12
191
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability
control valves.
25AF13
Powertrain control module B+ relay.5AF14
Powertrain control module power relay.40AF15
Body control module power feed.40AF16
Ignition relay 3.40AF17
Modified vehicle connections.40AF18
Not used.-F19
Heated exterior mirror relay.5AF20
Modified vehicle ignition connections.10AF21
Passenger compartment fuse panel.15AF22
Air conditioning control module.7.5AF23
Cutaway body connectors.10AF24
Interior lighting.7.5AF25
Heated exterior mirrors.10AF26
Heated rear window.20AF27
Heated rear window.20AF28
Rear parking aid camera.
10AF29 Lane keeping system.
Electro mirror.
Not used.-F30
Trailer brake ignition feed.10AF31
Interior lighting.10AF32
Not used.-F33
Not used.-F34
Power folding mirrors.5AF35
Horn.20AF36
SYNC module.7.5AF37
192
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Blower motor.
5AF38 Horn relay.
Windshield wiper relay.
Remote keyless entry.
7.5AF39 Battery.
Power windows.
Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
Front blower motor.40AF40
Rear blower motor.40AF41
Heated rear window.40AF42
Trailer socket.30AF43
Auxiliary power points.60AF44
Trailer connectors B+ supply.40AF45
Power windows.30AF46
Cigar lighter socket.20AF47
Rear auxiliary power points.20AF48
Front auxiliary power points.20AF49
Ignition relay 1.60AF50
Ignition relay 2.60AF51
Modified vehicle connections.40AF52
Modified vehicle connections.40AF53
Circuits switchedRelay
Not used (spare).R1
Auxiliary power points.R2
Trailer tow parking lamp.R3
Ignition 2.R4
Power windows.R5
Ignition 1.R6
193
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Horn.R7
Trailer tow back-up lamp.R8
Front blower motor.R9
Rear blower motor.R10
Heated rear window.
R11 Heated exterior mirrors.
Not used.R12
Modified vehicle connections.R13
Pre-fuse Box
E191034
Circuits protected
Fusible link
rating
Fusible link
Engine compartment fuse box.
470AC Starter motor.
Alternator.
Passenger compartment fuse panel.100AD
194
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits protected
Fusible link
rating
Fusible link
Body control module fuse box.
Powertrain control module.
40AE Anti-lock brake system.
Passenger compartment fuse panel.200AF
Passenger compartment fuse panel.100AG
Positive temperature coefficient heater.80AH
Not used.-J
Engine junction box feed.100AK
Passenger compartment fuse panel.100AL
Passenger compartment fuse panel supply.60AM
Passenger compartment fuse panel supply.60AN
Auxiliary power point 1.60AP
Auxiliary power point 2.60AR
Auxiliary power point 3.60AS
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Not used.-F1
Not used.-F2
Not used.-F3
Not used.-F4
R4 relay power.20AF5
R3 relay power.20AF6
R2 relay power.20AF7
R1 relay power.20AF8
Not used.-F9
195
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Not used.-F10
Not used.-F11
Switch power.3AF12
Circuits switchedRelay
Upfitter 1.R1
Upfitter 2.R2
Upfitter 3.R3
Upfitter 4.R4
Not used.R5
Not used.R6
Not used.R7
196
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Body Control Module
E148830
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Central locking system 2.15AF1
Central locking system 1.15AF2
Ignition switch.15AF3
Parking assist control module.
5AF4 Brake transmission shift interlock.
Rain sensor module.5AF5
Windshield washer pump.15AF6
Not used.-F7
197
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Not used.-F8
Right-hand high beam.10AF9
Left-hand high beam.10AF10
Right-hand exterior lamps.
25AF11 Left-hand position lamps.
Not used.-F12
On-board diagnostic.
15AF13 Battery saver.
Turn signal indicator.
25AF14 Power windows delayed accessory.
Lane departure sensor heated windshield pad.
Left-hand exterior lamps.
25AF15 Right-hand position lamps.
High mounted stoplamp.
Audio unit.
20AF16 Navigation unit.
Instrument panel cluster.
7.5AF17 Heater control.
Headlamp switch module.
10AF18 Steering wheel module.
Stoplamp switch supply.
Front control/display interface module.5AF19
Ignition passive anti-theft system.5AF20
Accessory relay, customer access feed.3AF21
CHANGING A FUSE
WARNINGS
Do not modify the electrical system
of your vehicle in any way. Have
repairs to the electrical system and
the replacement of relays and high current
fuses carried out by an authorized dealer.
WARNINGS
Switch the ignition and all electrical
equipment off before attempting to
change a fuse.
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
198
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
E142430
If electrical components in your vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. A
break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
199
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine
service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E175221
1. Pull the hood release lever.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
200
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
E135852
3. Move the catch to the left to release
the hood.
E87786
4. Open the hood and support it with the
hood strut.
Closing the Hood
1. Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly in the clip.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8-12
in (20-30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L
E174601
ACD
E
G
H
B
F
201
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 223).A
Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204).B
Brake fluid reservoir*. See Brake Fluid Check (page 210).C
Engine coolant reservoir*. See Engine Coolant Check (page 206).D
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 186).E
Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 204).F
Power steering fluid reservoir*. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210).G
Washer fluid reservoir*. See Washer Fluid Check (page 210).H
* The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L
E174602
ACD
E
G
H
B
F
Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 224).A
Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204).B
Brake fluid reservoir*. See Brake Fluid Check (page 210).C
Engine coolant reservoir*. See Engine Oil Check (page 204).D
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 186).E
Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 204).F
202
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Power steering fluid reservoir*. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210).G
Washer fluid reservoir*. See Washer Fluid Check (page 210).H
* The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
E174603
ABCDE
F
G
H
Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 225).A
Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204).B
Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 204).C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir*. See Brake Fluid Check (page 210).D
Engine coolant reservoir*. See Engine Coolant Check (page 206).E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 186).F
Power steering fluid reservoir*. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210).G
Washer fluid reservoir*. See Washer Fluid Check (page 210).H
* The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.
203
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L
E174604
AB
MinimumA
MaximumB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.7L
E174604
AB
MinimumA
MaximumB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.2L
POWER STROKE DIESEL
E71362
A B
MinimumA
MaximumB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Switch off the engine and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265).
Note: Check the oil level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
Note: Do not use oil additives or other
engine treatments. Under certain conditions,
they could damage the engine.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3000 mi (5,000 km).
204
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265).
3. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it until you feel a strong resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
AND OIL FILTER
WARNINGS
Prolonged and repeated skin contact
with mineral oil will result in the
removal of natural fats from the skin,
leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis.
In addition, used engine oil contains
potentially harmful contaminants, which
may cause skin cancer. If skin contact
occurs, wash the area thoroughly with
soap or skin cleanser and water
immediately.
Do not dispose of engine oils or oil
filters in the household refuse or the
public sewage system. Use an
authorized waste disposal facility.
Do not remove the oil pan drain plug
when the engine is running.
WARNINGS
Do not remove the oil filter when the
engine is running.
1. Remove the oil pan drain plug and wait
for the oil to drain into a suitable
container.
2. Renew the oil filter.
3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug.
4. Refill the engine with new oil that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
5. Reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor.
See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 206).
Engine Lubrication for Severe
Service Operation
The following conditions define severe
service operation. The Intelligent Oil Life
Monitor will determine engine oil and oil
filter change intervals.
Frequent or extended idling.
Frequent low-speed operation at
25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
Frequent severe dust condition
operation.
Frequent off-road operation.
Sustained ambient temperatures of
-9°F (-23°C) or below.
Sustained ambient temperatures of
100°F (38°C) or above.
Sustained towing operation above
1000 mi (1,600 km).
205
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Sustained high-speed driving at Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum
loaded weight for vehicle operation).
Sustained use of diesel fuel other than
ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD).
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System
Only reset the oil life monitoring system
after changing the engine oil and oil filter.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine. For vehicles with push-button
start, press and hold the start button
for two seconds without pressing the
brake pedal. Do not start the engine.
2. Press the accelerator and brake pedals
at the same time.
3. Keep the accelerator and brake pedals
fully pressed.
4. After three seconds, a message
confirming that the reset is in progress
will be displayed.
5. After 25 seconds, a message
confirming that the reset is complete
will be displayed.
6. Release the accelerator and brake
pedals.
7. The message confirming that the reset
is complete will no longer be displayed.
8. Switch the ignition off. For vehicles with
push-button start, press the start
button to switch the ignition off.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant
reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -29.2°F
(-34°C) and -34.5°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer, for example Robinair®
coolant and battery refractometer 75240.
We do not recommend the use of
hydrometers or coolant test strips for
measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
206
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. The vehicle warranty does
not cover this damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate that the
engine coolant has degraded or that you
drain the engine coolant, flush the system
or replace the engine coolant.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the
correct coolant is used. Mixing of
engine coolants may harm the engines
cooling system. The use of incorrect
coolant may harm engine and cooling
system components and may void the
warranty. Use prediluted engine
coolant meeting the Ford specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 265).
In case of emergency, you can add a
large amount of water without engine
coolant in order to reach a vehicle
service location. In this instance, you
must have the cooling system drained,
chemically cleaned with Motorcraft
Premium Cooling System Flush, and
refilled with engine coolant as soon as
possible. Water alone (without engine
coolant) can cause engine damage, for
example corrosion, overheating or
freezing.
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze. Alcohol and
other liquids can cause engine damage,
for example overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful
and compromise the corrosion
protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
Whenever you add coolant, check the
coolant level in the coolant reservoir the
next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine
coolant to bring the coolant level to the
correct level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant since a Ford-approved
recycling process is not yet available.
207
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
communitys regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the corrosion or
freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
this feature allows you to temporarily drive
your vehicle before you incur incremental
component damage. The fail-safe distance
depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle
load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red area and:
The coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still
operate. However:
The engine power will be limited.
This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and the engine will
completely shut down, causing steering
and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Turned On
WARNING
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate the
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down and lose power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
208
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
The engine is capable of completely
shutting down automatically to prevent
engine damage, if this situation occurs:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the ignition off.
2. Have your vehicle towed to an
authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish
if low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance of
engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING
To reduce the risk of a crash and
injury, be prepared that the vehicle
speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the fluid temperature reduces.
When towing a trailer the vehicles engine
may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in hot ambient
temperatures.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
The design of your vehicle allows it to enter
this mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine fluid temperatures. The
amount of speed reduction will depend on
the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient
temperature and other factors. If this
occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
You can continue to drive your vehicle
while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When
the engine coolant temperature decreases
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on. If you notice any
of the following:
The engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red area.
The coolant temperature warning light
illuminates.
The service engine soon indicator
illuminates.
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and place the vehicle in park
(P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red area. After
several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, you may
restart the engine and continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant,
restart the engine and take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
209
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips, shifts
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking
fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range;
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid
levels are outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. This could cause serious
personal injury. Rinse the affected
areas immediately with plenty of water
and consult a physician.
If the power steering fluid level is not
between the MAX and MIN marks, add
power steering fluid that meets the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 271).
Adding Power Steering Fluid
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add power steering fluid to the MAX
mark. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
Note: The reservoir supplies the front and
rear washer systems.
When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer
fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
cold weather and improve the cleaning
capability. We recommend that you use
only high quality washer fluid.
For information on fluid dilution, refer to
the product instructions.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP
WARNING
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
Your vehicle is fitted with a diesel fuel
conditioner module located behind the fuel
tank. A warning lamp will illuminate and a
message will be displayed when
approximately 3.38 (100 ml) of water
accumulates in the module. If you allow
the water level to exceed this level, the
water may pass through to the engine and
may cause fuel injection equipment
damage.
Note: To drain the fuel filter water trap,
access the underside of your vehicle.
210
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
E177378
2
1
1. Attach a tube to the drain plug and
place the end of the tube into a
suitable container.
2. Loosen the drain plug by turning
counterclockwise one to two turns and
allow the water to drain.
Note: The drain plug will rise when opening.
3. Tighten the drain plug by turning
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: The drain plug will lower when
closing.
When you start the engine the water in fuel
indicator lamp turns off after a short period
of time.
Changing the Fuel Filter
Note: To drain the fuel filter, access the
underside of your vehicle.
1. Drain the fuel from the filter housing.
E184430
2
3
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Rotate the housing counterclockwise
to the unlock position.
4. Remove the housing and filter.
5. Replace the housing seal and lubricate.
6. Insert the new filter into housing and
refit aligning the arrows in the unlock
position.
211
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
E184789
7
7. Rotate the housing clockwise aligning
the arrows in the lock position.
8. Purge air from the system.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford
specification. See Fuel and Refueling
(page 109).
Purging Air From the Fuel System
1. Switch the ignition on for at least 30
seconds then switch the ignition off.
2. Repeat this process six times.
3. Start the engine and maintain engine
speed at 1500 RPM.
4. Wait 20 seconds.
5. If the engine is running smoothly,
reduce the engine speed to idle.
6. Check for leaks.
7. Switch the ignition off.
If the Engine Does Not Start or Runs
Rough
E177379
1
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap.
2. Attach suitable tool with a tube to the
Schrader valve and place the end of
the tube into a suitable container.
3. Open the Schrader valve.
4. Switch the ignition on until a steady
stream of fuel can be seen coming out
of the tube.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Remove the tool from the Schrader
valve.
7. Refit the Schrader valve cap.
8. Switch the ignition on for at least 30
seconds then switch the ignition off.
9. Repeat this process three times.
10. Start the engine.
FUEL FILTER - GASOLINE
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
212
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
Removing the Battery
WARNINGS
You must replace your vehicle
battery with one of exactly the same
specification.
Make sure the battery box is correctly
sealed.
Your vehicle battery is heavy; take
care when lifting and removing.
Note: If you have power seats and the
battery has no charge, jump-start your
vehicle to move the seat. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 177).
Note: Where applicable you must
reprogram the audio system using the
keycode.
The battery is located inside your vehicle
under the driver seat.
E152526
1
1. Slide the seat fully forward. Remove
the cover trim by pulling up the tabs
with your fingers.
2
E152529
2. Unhook the cover flap and tuck it under
the seat valance.
E146781
3
4
3. Remove the seat track end caps on
both sides.
4. Remove the seat track rear bolts on
both sides.
213
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
5
6
E146773
5. Remove the battery clamp and cover
bolts.
6. Remove the battery clamp and cover.
E162774
7
7. Remove the battery terminal cover.
8
E162775
8. Remove the cable securing clips from
the cover. Release the retaining clips
and remove the cover.
E162776
9
9. Disconnect the battery. Remove the
negative (-) terminal first.
Installing the Battery
WARNING
Make sure that you securely fasten
the seat runner bolts before installing
the covers.
214
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Install in the reverse order.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Changing the Windshield Wiper
Blades
Lift the wiper arm.
E72899
1
2
1. Press the locking button.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order. Make sure
that the wiper blade locks into place.
Note: The windshield wiper blades are
different in length. If you install wiper blades
of the wrong length, the rain sensor may not
work correctly.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam
checked by an authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Ground to the center of the
headlamp bulb
B
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
from a wall or screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp bulb and
mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long
horizontal reference line on the wall or
screen at this height.
215
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Note: To see a clearer light pattern while
adjusting one headlamp, you may want to
block the light from the other headlamp.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the beam pattern.
If the top edge of the flat zone of high
intensity light is not on the horizontal
reference line, adjust the aim of the
headlamp beam.
E164485
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a suitable tool, for
example a screwdriver or hexagonal
socket, to turn the adjuster clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp. The
horizontal edge of the brighter light
should touch the horizontal reference
line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
The horizontal aim of the headlamp beam
on your vehicle is not adjustable.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
WARNING
Switch all of the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious
personal injury.
1. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 200).
E169198
2
2. Remove the screws.
216
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
E169199
3. Pull the headlamp toward the front of
your vehicle to disengage it from its
locating points and then lift the
headlamp up.
E169200
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
Note: When you install the headlamp, make
sure that you correctly attach the electrical
connector.
Note: When you install the headlamp, make
sure that you correctly engage its locating
points.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNINGS
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 221).
The following instructions describe how to
remove the bulbs. Install in the reverse
order unless otherwise stated.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See
an authorized dealer.
Headlamp
E175739
BCD
A
Parking lamp and direction
indicator lamp.
A
Headlamp high beam.B
Headlamp low beam and
daytime running lamp.
C
Side marker lamp.D
Note: You may have to remove a cover to
gain access to the bulb.
217
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Side Marker Lamp
3
E175740
2
1. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Parking Lamp and Direction Indicator
Lamp
3
E175741
2
1. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Headlamp Low Beam and Daytime
Running Lamp
43
2
E175742
1. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Headlamp High Beam
4
3
2
E175743
1. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
218
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Front Clearance Lamp (If Equipped)
E181397
2
1
1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Side Direction Indicator (If Equipped)
E169209 3
1
4
5
2
1. Remove the large mirror glass. Tilt the
mirror glass fully up, pull the mirror
glass toward you from the bottom.
2. Remove the small mirror glass. Tilt the
mirror glass fully down, pull the mirror
glass toward you from the top.
3. Remove the screws.
4. Remove the lamp lens.
5. Remove the bulb.
Rear Lamps
E175758
2
1
1. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the lamp.
219
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
3
E175745
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
A
B
C
4
E175746
Tail and brake lamp.A
Reversing lamp.B
Rear clearance lamp.C
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp
This is not a serviceable item, see an
authorized dealer if it fails.
License Plate Lamp
3
2
1
E72789
1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. Pull the bulb straight
out.
Interior Lamp
Vehicles with Interior Sensors
1
2
E154370
1. Carefully remove the lens.
2. Remove the bulb.
220
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Reading Lamps
Vehicles with Interior Sensors
22
1
E72786
1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
E73939
3
3. Remove the bulb.
Vehicles without Interior Sensors
E99453
2
3
1
1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.
Sun Visor Mirror Lamp
E72785
1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Exterior Lamps
Power (watt)SpecificationLamp
26/63057KBrake, tail and direction indicator lamp
5W5WFront clearance lamp (Exterior mirror)
213457NAKFront direction indicator lamp
221
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
Power (watt)SpecificationLamp
5W5WFront I.D. lamp
5168Front side marker lamp
609005
High beam headlamp and Daytime
running lamp
5W5WLicense plate lamp
55H11Low beam headlamp
5168Rear clearance lamp
263057KReversing lamp
5W5WSide direction indicator
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an
authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (watt)SpecificationLamp
6W6WFront interior lamp
6Festoon
Front interior lamp - with category 1
alarm
10211 FestoonLuggage compartment lamp
6W6WMap reading lamp
10211 FestoonSide door entrance lamp
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an
authorized dealer if they fail.
222
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 3.5L
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The vehicle warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
Only use the specified air filter. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 440).
E174608
1
2
3
1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector and cable from
the air filter cover.
2. Clean the area around the air tube to
air filter cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system and
then loosen the bolt on the air tube
clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
to the air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp. Pull the
air tube off from the air filter cover.
3. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter cover to the air filter housing.
E174669
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
5. Install a new air filter element.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover.
Engage the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover to the air filter
housing. Be careful not to crimp the
filter element edges between the air
filter housing and cover. Make sure that
the tabs on the edge are correctly
aligned into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
8. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position.
223
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 3.7L
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The vehicle warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
Only use the specified air filter. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 440).
E174608
1
2
3
1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector and cable from
the air filter cover.
2. Clean the area around the air tube to
air filter cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system and
then loosen the bolt on the air tube
clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
to the air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp. Pull the
air tube off from the air filter cover.
3. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter cover to the air filter housing.
E174669
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
5. Install a new air filter element.
6. Replace the air filter housing. Engage
the clamps that secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. Make sure that the
tabs on the edge are correctly aligned
into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
8. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position.
224
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 3.2L POWER STROKE
DIESEL
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The vehicle warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
Note: After operating the vehicle up to
200 mi (320 km) in heavy snowfall, we
recommend that you open the hood at the
earliest opportunity and clear the snow and
ice from air filter housing. Do not remove the
foam filter.
E177563
The foam filter must be in place at all
times.
Only use the specified air filter. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Change the air filter element and foam
filler at the proper interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).
E174609
1
2
3
1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector and cable from
the air filter cover.
2. Clean the area around the air tube to
air filter cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system and
then loosen the bolt on the air tube
clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
to the air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp. Pull the
air tube off from the air filter cover.
3. Release the clamps that secures the
air filter cover to the air filter housing.
225
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
E177562
3
5
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Make
sure that the groove seal on the
pleated paper filter traps both sides of
the vertical partition of the air box.
6. Replace the air filter housing. Engage
the clamps that secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. Make sure that the
tabs on the edge are correctly aligned
into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
8. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position.
226
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Maintenance
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada
only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover
(U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Note: If you use a car wash with a waxing
cycle, make sure that you remove the wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades.
Note: Prior to using a car wash facility
check the suitability of it for your vehicle.
Note: Some car washes use water at high
pressure. Due to this, water droplets may
enter inside your vehicle and could also
damage certain parts of your vehicle.
Note: Remove the aerial before using an
automatic car wash.
Note: Switch the heater blower off to
prevent contamination of the fresh air filter.
We recommend that you wash your vehicle
with a sponge and lukewarm water
containing a car shampoo.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Cleaning the Rear Window
Note: Do not scrape the inside of the rear
window or use abrasives or chemical
solvents to clean it.
Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp
chamois leather to clean the inside of the
rear window.
Cleaning the Chrome Trim
Note: Do not use abrasives or chemical
solvents. Use soapy water.
Note: Do not apply cleaning product to hot
surfaces and do not leave cleaning product
on chrome surfaces for a period of time
exceeding that which is recommended.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, may cause
damage over a period of time.
Body Paintwork Preservation
WARNINGS
Do not polish your vehicle in strong
sunshine.
227
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Vehicle Care
WARNINGS
Do not allow polish to touch plastic
surfaces. It could be difficult to
remove.
Do not apply polish to the windshield
or rear window. This could cause the
wipers to become noisy and they
may not clear the window properly.
We recommend that you wax the
paintwork once or twice a year.
Sliding Door Tracks (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not open or close the sliding
doors when your hands are near the
tracks or rollers.
To clean the sliding door tracks, wipe the
surface using a clean, cotton cloth with a
mild soap and water solution.
Do not use high-pressure washing.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturers instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
Roof racks.
Bumpers.
Grained door handles.
Side moldings.
Mirror housings.
Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
228
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Vehicle Care
Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner.
For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a
spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage
may not be covered by your warranty.
Safety Belts
Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical
solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate
the safety belt retractor mechanism.
Clean them with interior cleaner or water
applied with a soft sponge. Let them dry
naturally, away from artificial heat.
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD
Screens and Radio Screens
Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic
solvents or chemical solvents to clean them.
Rear Windows
Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to
clean the interior of the rear windows.
Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp, white cotton
cloth, then use a clean and dry white
cotton cloth to dry these areas.
229
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Vehicle Care
Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands
clean if you have been in contact with
certain products such as insect
repellent and suntan lotion in order to
avoid possible damage to the interior
painted surfaces.
Do not use household or glass cleaners
as these may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Damage may not be covered by your
warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,
white cotton cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, use a mild soap and water
solution. If the spot cannot be
completely cleaned by this method,
the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning
product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, white, cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow
this to set at room temperature for 30
minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not
soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the
area by using a rubbing motion for 60
seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a
clean, white, cotton cloth.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
You should repair paintwork damage
caused by stones from the road or minor
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of
products are available from an authorized
dealer.
Remove particles such as bird droppings,
tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road
salt and industrial fallout before repairing
paint chips.
Always read and follow the manufacturers
instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
230
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Vehicle Care
Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
231
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Vehicle Care
Battery
Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
232
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and
Truck Owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires properly inflated,
never overload or improperly load your
vehicle, and make sure every passenger is
properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts.
Children and infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
How Your Vehicle Differs from
Other Vehicles
Sport-utility vehicles, vans and trucks can
differ from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
233
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
E166373
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle
so versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grades
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The tire Quality Grades can be
found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (C)(2).
Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
United States Department of
Transportation Tire Quality
Grades
The United States of America
Department of Transportation
requires Ford Motor Company to
give you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
234
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tires ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is correctly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tires resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Tire label: A label showing the
OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation
pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the
sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire
brand and manufacturing
plant, tire size and date of
manufacture. Also referred to
as DOT code.
Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
235
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires
designed to carry a maximum
load at set pressure. For
example: for P-metric tires
35 psi (2.4 bar) or 36 psi
(2.5 bar) depending on tire size
and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the
inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the
tire capability.
Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry
a heavier maximum load at
42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the
inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the
tires load carrying capability.
bar Metric unit of atmospheric
pressure.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit
of air pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of
direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle
being driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position) or Tire
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver door.
B-pillar: The structural
member at the side of the
vehicle behind the front door.
Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support
(wheel) for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
United States of America, and
Canada Federal regulations
require tire manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
236
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a United States of
America DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
P Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below.
Note: Tire size, load index and
speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from the following
example.
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P: Indicates a tire,
designated by the Tire
and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks.
A
215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in
millimeters from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
B
65: Indicates the aspect
ratio which gives the tire's
ratio of height to width.
C
R: Indicates a radial type
tire.
D
237
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
15: Indicates the wheel or
rim diameter in inches. If
you change the wheel
size, you will have to
purchase new tires to
match the new wheel
diameter.
E
95: Indicates the tire's
load index. It is an index
that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry.
You may find this
information in the Owners
Guide. If not, contact a
local tire dealer.
F
H: Indicates the tire's
speed rating. The speed
rating denotes the speed
at which a tire is designed
to be driven for extended
periods of time under a
G
standard condition of load
and inflation pressure.
The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and
inflation pressure. These
speed ratings may need
to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions.
The ratings range from 81
mph (130 kph) to 186 mph
(299 kph). These ratings
are listed in the following
chart.
United States of
America DOT Tire
Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire
H
meets all federal
standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the
plant code designating
where it was
manufactured, the next
two are the tire size code
and the last four numbers
represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317
mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the
numbers go to four digits.
For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001.
The numbers in between
are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to
contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
M+S or M/S: Mud and
Snow, AT: All Terrain, AS:
All Season.
I
Tire Ply Composition
and Material Used:
Indicates the number of
plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and
J
sidewall. Tire
238
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
manufacturers also must
indicate the ply materials
in the tire and the
sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
Maximum Load:
Indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and
pounds that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to
the Safety Compliance
K
Certification Label
(affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver
seating position), for the
correct tire pressure for
your vehicle.
Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature
Grades:Treadwear The
treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire
L
when tested under
controlled conditions on
a specified government
test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half
times as well on the
government course as a
tire graded 100. Traction:
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA,
A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability
to stop on wet pavement
as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature: The
temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's
resistance to the
generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat
when tested under
controlled conditions on
a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the
tire manufacturer's
maximum permissible
pressure or the pressure
at which the maximum
M
load can be carried by the
tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the
manufacturer's
recommended cold
inflation pressure, which
can be found on the
Safety Compliance
Certification Label
(affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver
seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of
239
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
the driver door. The cold
inflation pressure should
never be set lower than
the recommended
pressure on the vehicle
label.
Tire speed ratings
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
Note: If the tire size does not begin
with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association). You
may not find this information on all
tires because it is not required by
federal law.
Note: The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings, for example standard
load, radial tubeless, etc.
T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size. T type tires have some
additional information beyond
those of P type tires. The
definitions of these items are
listed below.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
240
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
BCDE
E142545
T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire
and Rim Association, that
is intended for temporary
service on cars,
sport-utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks.
A
145: Indicates the
nominal width of the tire
in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the
tire.
B
80: Indicates the aspect
ratio which gives the tire's
ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower
indicate a short sidewall.
C
D: Indicates a diagonal
type tire. R: Indicates a
radial type tire.
D
16: Indicates the wheel or
rim diameter in inches. If
you change the wheel
size, you will have to
purchase new tires to
match the new wheel
diameter.
E
Additional Information for LT
Type Tires
LT235/85 R16 is an example of a
tire size. LT type tires have some
additional information beyond
those of P type tires. The
definitions of these items are
listed below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
241
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
BC
B
D
E142544
LT: Indicates a tire,
designated by the Tire
and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended
for service on light trucks.
A
Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits:
Indicates the tire's
load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
B
Maximum Load Dual lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold:
Indicates the maximum
load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a
dual, defined as four tires
on the rear axle (a total of
six or more tires on the
vehicle).
C
Maximum Load Single
lb (kg) at psi (kPa)
cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is
used as a single, defined
as two tires (total) on the
rear axle.
D
United States of America DOT
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
United States of America, and
Canada Federal regulations
require tire manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a United States of
America DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
242
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver door.
Inflating the Tires
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that the tires are correctly
inflated.
Every day before you drive, check
the tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips inspect each tire
including the spare tire. Check the
tire pressure with a tire pressure
gauge. Inflate all tires to the
correct inflation pressure.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. We
recommend the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns
Always inflate the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
found on the tire. The
recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
243
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. Failure to follow
the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of your vehicle. If you do not
maintain the tire pressures as
specified by Ford, your vehicle may
experience a condition known as
shimmy. This will cause severe
vibration and oscillations in the
steering wheel when your vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road and is unable to dampen out
by itself. Significantly
under-inflated tires, incorrect tire
usage or any vehicle modifications
such as lift-kits can cause your
vehicle to shimmy. If your vehicle
begins to shimmy, slowly reduce
the speed of your vehicle by
pressing the brake pedal or
releasing the accelerator pedal. As
your vehicle speed reduces the
shimmy will cease.
The maximum inflation pressure
is the tire manufacturer's
maximum permissible pressure or
the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by
the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturers
recommended cold inflation
pressure, which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of
10 psi (0.7 bar) in inflation
pressure. Check the tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
correct pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the tire pressures:
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press
the tire gauge onto the valve
and measure the tire pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended tire pressure.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
244
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire
and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts
or bulges.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, for
example you have driven more than
1.0 mi (1.6 km), never bleed or
reduce tire pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for the tires,
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the tire pressure to increase
as you drive.
Note: If you over inflate the tire,
release air by pressing on the metal
stem in the center of the valve.
Then recheck the pressure with
your tire gauge.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare
tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare
tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
Inspecting the Tires and Wheel
Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects, for example
stones, nails or glass that may be
wedged in the tread grooves.
Check the tire and valve stems for
holes, cracks, or cuts that may
permit air leakage and repair or
replace the tire and replace the
valve stem. Inspect the tire
sidewalls for cracking, cuts,
bruises and other signs of damage
or excessive wear. If internal
damage to the tire is suspected,
have the tire removed and
inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your
safety, tires that are damaged or
show signs of excessive wear
should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
245
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Incorrect or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all the
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
0.08 in (2 mm), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to 0.08 in (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Tire Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage, for
example bulges in the tread or
sidewalls, cracks in the tread
groove or separation in the tread
or sidewall. If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Tire Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors,
for example weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use,
for example load, speed and
inflation pressures the tires
experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace the spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
246
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Replacement
Requirements
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type, (for example P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNINGS
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12.1 ft (3.7 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.
Your vehicle is fitted with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
We recommend that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
Note: The wheel valve stems must
also be replaced when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
Fitting Replacement Tires
WARNINGS
When mounting replacement
tires and wheels, you should
not exceed the maximum pressure
indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
For mounting pressures
above 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum
pressure on the tire sidewall, the
tire should be replaced by a tire
professional.
247
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
For mounting pressures up to 1.38
bar greater than the maximum
pressure on the tire sidewall, the
following precautions must be
taken:
Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area.
Stand at a minimum of 12.1 ft
(3.7 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
Use eye and ear protection.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (If Equipped)
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of the tire pressure
monitoring system. If the tire
pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, the tire
pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. The replacement
tire might be incompatible with
the tire pressure monitoring
system, or a component of the tire
pressure monitoring system may
be damaged. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 251).
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
Tire Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to
do with your tire mileage and
safety:
Observe posted speed limits.
Avoid fast starts, stops and
turns.
Avoid potholes and objects on
the road.
Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when
parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
248
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect a tire or your vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with the spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
the tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of the tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle
is fitted with a tire pressure
monitoring system, the settings
for the system sensors need to be
reset. Always carry out the system
reset procedure after tire rotation.
If the system is not reset, it may
not provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary. See Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(page 251).
Rotating the tires at the
recommended interval detailed in
the Scheduled Maintenance
chapter will help the tires wear
more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: After rotating the tires the
inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle
requirements.
Note: If the tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
249
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Your vehicle may have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly is defined as a
spare wheel and tire assembly that
is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Rear-wheel drive and
four-wheel drive vehicles with
single rear wheels (front tires
at left of diagram).
E142548
Rear-wheel drive and
four-wheel drive vehicles with
dual rear wheels.
E166988
USING WINTER TIRES
WARNING
When you use winter tires on your
vehicle, you must make sure that you
use the correct lug nuts.
If winter tires are used, you must make sure
that you use the correct tire pressures.
250
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires or snow chains.
If you choose to install snow tires on your
vehicle, they must be the same size,
construction, and load range as the original
tires listed on the tire inflation pressure
label (located on the edge of driver door
or the B-Pillar) and they must be installed
on all four wheels. Mixing tires of different
size or construction on your vehicle can
adversely affect your vehicles handling
and braking, and may lead to loss of
vehicle control.
If you use snow chains, we recommended
that steel wheels of the same size and
specifications are used, snow chains may
damage aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
chains:
Avoid fully loading your vehicle.
Only certain snow chains or cables
have been approved by Ford as safe
for use on vehicles with either 235/65
R16C or 195/75 R16C tires.
Snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the rear tires only.
Install snow chains securely, make sure
they do not touch any wiring, brake
lines or fuel lines.
S class or 15mm or less in dimension
as measured on the sidewall of the tire.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or
the maximum speed recommended by
the chain manufacturer, whichever is
less.
Purchase snow chains or cables from
a manufacturer that clearly labels the
body to tire dimension restrictions.
Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed.
Do not use snow chains on dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding
snow chains or cables, see an
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
251
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the drivers responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
252
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The system measures the pressure in the
four road tires and sends the tire pressure
readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will illuminate if any
of the tire pressures are significantly low.
If the warning light is illuminated, one or
more of the tires are under-inflated and
need to be inflated to the correct pressure.
When the Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
If one of the road wheels and tire needs to
be replaced with the temporary spare
wheel and tire, the system will continue to
identify a defect. This is to remind you that
the damaged road wheel and tire must be
repaired and refitted to your vehicle.
To restore the correct operation of the
system, you must have the repaired road
wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
vehicle. For additional information, see
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in this section.
When You Believe the System is Not
Operating Correctly
The main function of the system is to warn
you when the tire pressures are low. It can
also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of operating correctly.
See the following chart for information
concerning the system:
Action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
1. Make sure tires are at the correct pres-
sure. See Inflating the tires in this
chapter.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
2. After inflating the tires to the correct
pressure See Maintenance (page 200).
or the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door or the
B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for
at least two minutes at over 20 mph (32
km/h) before the light will turn off.
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and refit it to your vehicle to
restore correct system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When the temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
253
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, you must retrain the
system following every tire rotation. See
Tire Care (page 234).
Tire rotation without
sensor training
If the tires are correctly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and refit it to your vehicle to
restore correct system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When the temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are correctly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
When Inflating the Tires
When inflating the tires (for example; at a
gas station), the system may not respond
immediately to the air added to the tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects the Tire
Pressures
While driving in a normal manner, tire
pressures may increase up to 4 psi (0.3
bar) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight and the
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, tire pressures may
decrease up to 3 psi (0.2 bar) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value will be detected by
the system as being significantly lower
than the correct inflation pressure and the
warning light will illuminate.
If the warning light is on:
Check each tire to verify that none are
flat.
If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary.
Check the tire pressures and Inflate all
the tires to the correct pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Reset Procedure
Note: The system reset procedure needs
to be carried out after each tire replacement.
254
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Overview
WARNING
To determine the required
pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
To maintain your vehicles load carrying
capability, this vehicle requires different
tire pressures in the front tires compared
to the rear tires. The system on your vehicle
is designed to illuminate the warning light
at different pressures for the front and rear
tires.
The tires need to be periodically rotated
to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the system needs to
know when the tires have been rotated to
determine which set of tires are on the
front and rear axles. With this information,
the system can detect and correctly warn
of low tire pressures.
System Reset Tips:
To reduce the chance of interference
from another vehicle, the system reset
procedure should be carried out at
least three feet (one meter) away from
another Ford vehicle undergoing the
system reset procedure.
Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels. A double horn chirp
indicates the need to repeat the
procedure.
Carrying Out the System Reset
Procedure
Read the entire procedure before carrying
out a system reset.
1. Drive your vehicle above 20 mph (32
km/h) for at least two minutes and
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all four tires and have
access to a tire inflation pump.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Switch the ignition on with the engine
off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times, this must be completed
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn
will chirp once and the system indicator
will flash. If this does not occur, repeat
the procedure from step 2. If after
repeated attempts to enter the reset
mode, the horn does not chirp and the
system indicator does not flash, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
5. Train the system sensors in the tires
using the following reset sequence
starting with the left front tire and
following a clockwise order: Left front,
right front, right rear, left rear.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn chirps.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by your vehicle for this position. If a
double horn chirp is heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be
repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn chirps.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn chirps.
255
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn chirps.
Training is complete when the horn
chirps after the last system sensor (left
rear) has been trained and the system
indicator stops flashing.
10. Switch the ignition off. If two short
horn chirps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and
must be repeated.
Note: If after repeating the procedure two
short horn chirps are heard again, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
11. Set all four tires to the correct
pressure See Maintenance (page
200). or the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door or
the B-Pillar).
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 251).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
system sensors See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 251). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY
256
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
Tow a trailer.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
Use commercial car washing
equipment.
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
Handling, stability and braking
performance.
Comfort and noise.
Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
Winter weather driving capability.
Wet weather driving capability.
All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
Use commercial car washing
equipment.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
Handling, stability and braking
performance.
Comfort and noise.
Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
Winter weather driving capability.
Wet weather driving capability.
All-wheel driving capability
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
Towing a trailer.
Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Locking Lug Nuts
You can obtain replacement locking lug
nuts or a locking lug nut key using the
reference number certificate.
Vehicles With a Spare Wheel
Van, Bus or Wagon
The spare wheel is under the rear of your
vehicle.
If the spare wheel is the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, you can fit
the spare wheel and continue to drive in
the normal manner.
If the spare wheel is not the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, it has a
label showing the maximum driving speed
limit.
257
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with a tire
pressure monitoring system, the warning
indicator will flash if you fit the spare wheel
to your vehicle. To restore the correct
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system, you must have the repaired road
wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
vehicle. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 251). To prevent damage
occurring to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors, make sure you have a
damage tire repaired or replaced by a tire
professional.
E145138
1. Open the rear doors. Remove the
grommet and insert the flat end of the
lug wrench into the socket. Turn
counterclockwise until the spare wheel
rests on the ground and the cable is
loose.
E146811
2. Raise the cable end cover.
E146812
12
3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees.
Slide the cable through the slot to
release the spare wheel bracket from
the winch.
258
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
E146813
4. Remove the retaining nut to release
the spare wheel bracket.
Vehicles With a Spare Wheel
Chassis Cab and Cutaway
The spare wheel is under the rear of your
vehicle.
If the spare wheel is the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, you can fit
the spare wheel and continue to drive in
the normal manner.
If the spare wheel is not the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, it has a
label showing the maximum driving speed
limit.
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with a tire
pressure monitoring system, the warning
indicator will flash if you fit the spare wheel
to your vehicle. To restore the correct
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system, you must have the repaired road
wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
vehicle. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 251). To prevent damage
occurring to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors, make sure you have a
damage tire repaired or replaced by a tire
professional.
E184880
1. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
into the socket. Turn counterclockwise
until the spare wheel rests on the
ground and the cable is loose.
E146811
2. Raise the cable end cover.
259
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
E146812
12
3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees.
Slide the cable through the slot to
release the spare wheel bracket from
the winch.
E146813
4. Remove the retaining nut to release
the spare wheel bracket.
Vehicle Jack
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P), set the parking brake and block (in
both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Disable the power running boards
before jacking, lifting, or placing any
object under the vehicle. Never place
your hand between the power running
board and the vehicle as extended power
running boards will retract when the doors
are closed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Vehicles with a Temporary Mobility
Kit do not have a vehicle jack or a lug
wrench.
260
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
Vehicle Jack Storage
The vehicle jack is under the passenger
seat. The jack handle and lug wrench are
located in a storage compartment in the
front right-hand side stepwell.
Note: The vehicle jack is in the load space
area on vehicles with rear climate control.
E70959
1. Assemble the jack handle.
2. Insert the jack handle onto the release
valve and rotate clockwise until you
feel a strong resistance.
3. Insert the jack handle into the pump
and use a pumping action to raise your
vehicle.
4. Insert the jack handle into the release
valve and rotate counterclockwise to
lower your vehicle.
Front Jacking Points
WARNING
You must use the specified jacking
points.
Note: If your vehicle has rear air
conditioning make sure the vehicle jack does
not come in contact with the air conditioning
lines.
E171405
Position the head of the vehicle jack under
the protrusions at the rear of front
sub-frame.
Rear Jacking Points
WARNING
You must use the specified jacking
points.
261
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
E171406
Position the head of the vehicle jack under
the rear axle.
Removing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Park your vehicle so that you do not
obstruct the flow of traffic or place
yourself in any danger and set up a
warning triangle.
Switch the ignition off and apply the
parking brake.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, shift into first or reverse
gear. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, shift into park (P).
Make sure all passengers are out of
your vehicle.
Make sure that your vehicle is on firm
and level ground with the front
wheels pointing straight ahead.
WARNINGS
Chock the diagonally opposite wheel
to the punctured tire with an
appropriate block or wheel chock. A
wheel chock may be located in the B-pillar
or in a storage compartment in the front
right-hand side stepwell.
Make sure that the arrows on
directional tires point in the direction
of rotation when your vehicle is
moving forward. If you have to fit a spare
tire with the arrows pointing in the opposite
direction have the tire refitted as soon as
possible.
1. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
between the wheel rim and the wheel
trim and carefully remove the wheel
trim.
2. Use the locking lug nut key to loosen
the locking lug nut.
3. Loosen the remaining lug nuts, but do
not remove them.
4. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clear
of the ground.
5. Remove the lug nuts and the road
wheel.
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face
down on the ground.
Installing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tire
sizes. Using other wheel and tire sizes
could damage your vehicle and will
make the National Type Approval invalid.
Make sure there is no lubrication
(grease or oil) on the threads or the
surface between the wheel lugs and
nuts. This can cause the lug nuts to loosen
while driving.
262
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Make sure the wheel and hub
contact surfaces are free from
foreign material.
Never use wheels or lug nuts
different than the original equipment
as this could damage the wheel or
mounting system. This damage could
allow the wheels to come off when your
vehicle is moving.
1. Install the wheel.
E70961
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
34
5
2. Install all of the lug nuts and partially
tighten them in the sequence shown.
3. Lower your vehicle and remove the
vehicle jack.
4. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in the
sequence shown.
5. Install the wheel trim.
Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug
nuts are against the wheel.
Note: Alloy wheel lug nuts are suitable for
use on a steel spare wheel.
Note: If the spare wheel is not the same
type and size as your vehicle road wheel
replace it as soon as possible.
Note: Check the lug nuts for correct
tightness and check the tire pressure as
soon as possible.
Stowing the Wheel and Vehicle
Jack
Note: Do not raise the spare wheel bracket
without a wheel attached. Damage can
occur to the winch mechanism if the spare
wheel bracket is lowered without a wheel
attached.
1. Attach the spare wheel bracket to the
wheel using the retaining nut.
2. Slide the cable through the slot and
attach the spare wheel bracket to the
winch.
3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees
and lower the cable end cover.
4. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
into the socket. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance. Make sure
the wheel is secure.
5. Stow the vehicle jack, jack handle and
lug wrench in their correct locations
and secure them with the straps.
263
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
LUG NUTS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)*
Bolt size
148 lb.ft (200 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance, for example tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
264
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
3.5L V6 EcoboostEngine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
.030-.033 in. (.75-.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.0:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L V6 Ecoboost Engines with A/C
E167467
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
3.7 V6Engine
226Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octane or E85Required fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
.049-.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.5:1Compression ratio
265
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
3.7L V6 Engines with A/C
E167464
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
3.2L Power Stroke DieselEngine
195Cubic inches
No. 2 DieselRequired fuel
1-2-4-5-3Firing order
15.4:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.2L Power Stroke Diesel Engines with
A/C
E175582
266
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L
3.5L V6 Ecoboost
Part numberComponent
FA-1916Air filter element
Service requiredAutomatic transmission fluid filter
BXT-48H6-610Battery
FL-500SOil filter
SP534Spark plugs
WW-2955 - driver sideWindshield wiper blades - vehicles with low
roof WW-2112 - passenger side
WW-2901 - driver sideWindshield wiper blades - vehicles with
medium or high roof WW-2049 - passenger side
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Companys specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
267
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
3.7L Duratec
Part numberComponent
FA-1916Air filter element
Service requiredAutomatic transmission fluid filter
BXT-48H6-610Battery
FL-500SOil filter
SP520Spark plugs
WW-2955 - driver sideWindshield wiper blades - vehicles with low
roof WW-2112 - passenger side
WW-2901 - driver sideWindshield wiper blades - vehicles with
medium or high roof WW-2049 - passenger side
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Companys specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
268
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
3.2L Power Stroke Diesel
Part numberComponent
FA-1921Pre air filter
FA-1916Air filter element
Service requiredAutomatic transmission fluid filter
BAGM-48H6-760 - dual batteriesBattery
FL-500SOil filter
FD-46-21Fuel filter
WW-2955 - driver sideWindshield wiper blades - vehicles with low
roof WW-2112 - passenger side
WW-2901 - driver sideWindshield wiper blades - vehicles with
medium or high roof WW-2049 - passenger side
Note: Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled maintenance and
are available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Companys specifications, and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your vehicle Warranty may be void
for any damage related to use of other parts.
Note: Should a Motorcraft oil filter not be available, use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
269
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
270
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E142806
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
DescriptionCode
Six-speed automatic trans-
mission 6R80
A
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant
system contains refrigerant R-134a
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Capacities
CapacityItem
5.9 qt (5.6 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter
5.4 qt (5.1 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter
1 qt (0.9 L)Engine oil top-up - raise the level on the dipstick
from minimum to maximum
16.4 qt (15.5 L)Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary
heater1
14.9 qt (14.1 L)Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary
heater1
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
Automatic transmission2, 3
25.1 gal (95 L)Fuel tank
4.8 qt (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system -
including headlamp washer
271
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
2.43 lb (1.1 kg)A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventila-
tion and air conditioning
1.76 lb (0.8 kg)A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning
9.5 fl oz (280 ml)A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, vent-
ilation and air conditioning
5.4 fl oz (160 ml)A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning
1Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.
2Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should
only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-AMotor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AMotor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
272
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BGrease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
273
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. Motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines are
also acceptable. Do not use oil labeled
with API SN service category unless the
label also displays the API certification
mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricant Standardization
and Approval Committee (ILSAC).
Note: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives. They are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that is not covered
by Fords warranty.
Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High
Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent,
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 or ISO 4925
Class 6. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause brake
system damage.
Use multi-purpose grease for door latches,
hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch
and seat tracks.
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grades this may lead to:
Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Longer engine cranking periods.
Increased emission levels.
Reduced engine performance.
Reduced fuel economy.
Degraded brake performance.
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant
system contains refrigerant R-134a
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Capacities
CapacityItem
6 qt (5.7 L)Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
5.5 qt (5.2 L)Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
1 qt (0.9 L)Engine oil top-up raise the level on the dipstick
from minimum to maximum
274
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
16.4 qt (15.5 L)Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary
heater1
14.9 qt (14.1 L)Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary
heater1
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
Automatic transmission2, 3
25.1 gal (95 L)Fuel tank
4.8 qt (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system
including headlamp washer
2.43 lb (1.1 kg)A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventila-
tion and air conditioning
1.76 lb (0.8 kg)A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning
9.5 fl oz (280 ml)A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, vent-
ilation and air conditioning
5.4 fl oz (160 ml)A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning
1Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.
2Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should
only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
275
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-AMotor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AMotor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
276
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BGrease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. Motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines are
also acceptable. Do not use oil labeled
with API SN service category unless the
label also displays the API certification
mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricant Standardization
and Approval Committee (ILSAC).
Note: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives. They are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that is not covered
by your Ford warranty.
277
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High
Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent,
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may
cause brake system damage.
Use multi-purpose grease for door latches,
hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch
and seat tracks.
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grades this may lead to:
Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Longer engine cranking periods.
Increased emission levels.
Reduced engine performance.
Reduced fuel economy.
Degraded brake performance.
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L
POWER STROKE DIESEL
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant
system contains refrigerant R-134a
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Capacities
CapacityItem
12.0 qt (11.4 L)Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
11.6 qt (11 L)Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
2.6 qt (2.5 L)Engine oil top-up raise the level on the dipstick
from minimum to maximum
15.3 qt (14.5 L)Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary
heater1
13.9 qt (13.2 L)Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary
heater1
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
Automatic transmission fluid2, 3
25.1 gal (95 L)Fuel tank
5.5 gal (21 L)Diesel exhaust fluid
4.8 qt (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system
including headlamp washer
2.43 lb (1.1 kg)A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventila-
tion and air conditioning
278
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
1.76 lb (0.8 kg)A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning
9.5 fl oz (280 ml)A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, vent-
ilation and air conditioning
5.4 fl oz (160 ml)A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning
1Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.
2Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should
only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-EMotor oil:
Motorcraft SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil
XO-5W40-5QSD
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
279
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BGrease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
Note: The American Petroleum Institute
(API) service symbol is used to identify the
correct engine oil for your vehicle's engine.
The API service symbol is on the oil
container.
280
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E179966
Note: The use of correct oil viscosities is
important for satisfactory operation.
Determine which oil viscosity best suits the
temperature range you expect to encounter
for the next service interval from the SAE
viscosity grade chart.
E176394
Note: For the use of biodiesel fuel (B6
B20), use SAE 5W-40 API CJ-4.
Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High
Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent,
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may
cause brake system damage.
Use multi-purpose grease for door latches,
hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch
and seat tracks.
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grades this may lead to:
Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Longer engine cranking periods.
Increased emission levels.
Reduced engine performance.
Reduced fuel economy.
Degraded brake performance.
281
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder
mode.
MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3
files may be less depending on the
structure of the CD and exact model
of radio present.
282
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3
file extension) and all folders
containing MP3 files, from F001
(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless
of being in a specific folder). In folder
mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
283
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
E175058
A B
D
C
G
H
I
J
K
F E
Display: Shows the status of the current mode selected.A
Clock: Press the button to select clock setup.B
Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band.
Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency
band.
C
Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To
store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns.
D
On, Off and VOL: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off. Turn
the dial to adjust the volume.
E
MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features.F
Sound: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, balance
or fade.
G
AUX: Press the button to access the AUX features, it will also cancel the menu
or list browsing.
H
284
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
Radio: Press the button to select different radio frequency bands. Press to
cancel the menu or list browsing.
I
Cursor up or down: Press the cursor up or down arrow buttons to adjust the
settings within the menus or to move to the next radio station while listening
to the radio on the FM or AM frequency band.
J
Mute: Press the button to mute the sound.K
Clock Button
This allows you to adjust the clock settings.
Press the Clock button until the following message is displayed.
Action and DescriptionMessage
Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to set the correct
hour.
Set Hour
Press the Clock button again until the following message is displayed.
Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to set the correct
minutes.
Set Minutes
Setting 24 Hour or 12 Hour Display
Press the Menu button until the following message is displayed.
Action and DescriptionMessage
Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to select one of the
following:
24 Hour
12 Hour
24 Hour
Note: The default setting is 24 hour.
Station Tuning Buttons
Seek Tuning
Select a frequency band and briefly press
one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop
at the first station it finds in the direction
you have chosen.
Manual Tuning
Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons
to tune up or down the frequency band in
small increments. To increment quickly,
press and hold until you find a station you
want to listen to.
285
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
Station Preset Buttons
This feature allows you to store your
favorite stations. They can be recalled by
selecting the appropriate frequency band
and pressing one of the preset buttons.
1. Select a frequency band.
2. Tune to the station required.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons. The audio unit will also mute
momentarily as confirmation.
You can repeat this on each frequency
band and for each preset button.
Menu Button
This allows you to adjust all of the audio
system settings. Press the button
repeatedly until the required setting is
displayed. Use the cursor up or down arrow
buttons to adjust the following settings:
Clock hour.
Clock minutes.
24 hour, 12 hour.
Bass.
Treble.
Balance.
Fade.
RDS.
Sound Button
This allows you to adjust the sound
settings for bass, treble, balance or fade.
1. Press the sound button until the
required setting is displayed.
2. Use the cursor up or down arrow
buttons to select the required level.
Note: Fade settings are only adjustable if
there are speakers in the rear of your vehicle.
AUX Button
Connect your media device to the audio
unit. See USB Port (page 297).
Select your media device as the audio
source by pressing the AUX button. After
connecting your media device, the first
track will start to play automatically.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls
most of the audio features. See MyFord
Touch (page 348).
286
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
E177140
C D
GEF
BA
- TUNE +: Press this button to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
A
Mute: Press the button to mute the sound.B
DISP: Press this button to switch the display screen off.C
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency
band or the next or previous track on a CD.
D
SOUND: Press this button to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance,
Fade and Occupancy.
E
ON/OFF and VOL: Press this button to switch the audio system off and on.
Turn to adjust the volume.
F
SOURCE: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM
and A/V input.
G
287
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: You can operate your audio system
for up to one hour after you switch the
ignition off. Press the on and off control to
operate the system with the ignition turned
off. The system automatically turns off after
one hour.
A B C D
F
G
E
K
L
M
N
O
II J
E166684
HH
288
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.A
Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system
choices.
B
OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections.C
Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information.D
TUNE - and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency
band.
E
Numeric keypad: In radio mode, store your favorite radio stations. To store a
radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone number.
F
Clock: Push to access clock settings. You can also set the clock by pressing
the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.
G
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
H
Seek: Press and release these buttons to go to the previous or next preset radio
station or disc track. Press and hold these buttons to fast forward to the previous
or next strong radio station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
I
On, off and volume: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn
to adjust the volume.
J
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.
K
SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade,
Balance and Occupancy. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
L
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC (page 300).
M
MEDIA: Press this button to switch between listening to a CD and the
SYNC-Media menu. To change the SYNC-Media device (such as switching from
a device plugged into the USB port to a Bluetooth audio device), press MENU
and scroll to Select Source.
N
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
O
289
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: You can operate your audio system
for up to one hour after you switch the
ignition off. Press the on and off control to
operate the system with the ignition turned
off. The system automatically turns off after
one hour.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
A B C D
F
G
E
L
M
N
O
P
J IJ K
E166685
HH
290
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.A
Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system
choices.
B
OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections.C
Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information.D
TUNE - and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency
band.
E
Numeric keypad: In radio mode, store your favorite radio stations. To store a
radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone number.
F
Clock: Push to access clock settings. You can also set the clock by pressing
the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.
G
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
H
Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade,
Balance and Occupancy. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
I
Seek: Press and release these buttons to go to the previous or next preset radio
station or disc track. Press and hold these buttons to fast forward to the previous
or next strong radio station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
J
On, off and volume: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn
to adjust the volume.
K
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.
L
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC (page 300).
M
MEDIA: Press this button to switch between listening to a CD and the
SYNC-Media menu. To change the SYNC-Media device (such as switching from
a device plugged into the USB port to a Bluetooth audio device), press MENU
and scroll to Select Source.
N
SIRIUS: Press this button to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.O
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
P
291
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the stations reception
area.
292
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
293
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
* http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
294
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, press Options.
295
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
296
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
AUDIO INPUT JACK
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location when your vehicle is
moving, for example the glove
compartment. Hard objects may become
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which
may increase the risk of serious injury.
E185568
The audio input jack allows you to connect
and play music from a portable music
player through your vehicle speakers. You
can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones. The
audio extension cable must have a 0.14 in
(3.5 mm) male connector at each end. The
audio extension cable must be long
enough to allow the portable music player
to be safely stored while your vehicle is
moving.
1. Make sure your vehicle is stationary
with the audio unit and the portable
music player switched off.
2. Plug the extension cable from the
portable music player into the audio
input jack.
3. Switch the audio unit on. Select either
a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch the portable music player on
and adjust the volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press the AUX button on the audio
unit. You should hear music from the
portable music player even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on the portable
music player as desired. Do this by
switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
297
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
WARNINGS
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your device
while your vehicle is moving.
Store all devices in a secure location
when your vehicle is moving, for
example the glove compartment.
Hard objects may become projectiles in a
crash or sudden stop, which may increase
the risk of serious injury.
E185567
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See (page 300).
The extension cable must be long enough
to allow the device to be safely stored
while your vehicle is moving.
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
The media hub is located in the center
console and has the following features:
E185339
A/V inputsA
SD card slotB
USB portsC
See MyFord Touch (page 348).
298
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
Description and ActionMessage
General error message for CD fault conditions. For
example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc.
Make sure the disc is loaded correctly. Clean and re-try,
or replace disc with known music disc. If the error
persists contact an authorized dealer.
Please check CD
General error message for a mechanism fault. The
system has detected a fault that requires service.
CD drive malfunction
General error message for the mechanism being too
hot. The unit will not work until it has cooled down. If
the error persists contact an authorized dealer.
CD drive high temp.
299
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E142598
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
Make and receive calls.
Access and play music from your
portable music player.
Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
& Information).*
Use applications, such as Pandora and
Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink.
Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
Stream music from your connected
phone.
Text message.
Use the advanced voice recognition
system
Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*These features require activation.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
300
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
Required to activate Vehicle Health
Report and to view the reports online.
Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and
to personalize your Saved Points and
Favorites.
Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
301
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
Helpful Hints
Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
After pressing the voice button, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the
system.
Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice button.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 61).
You can say any of the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Stream audio from your phone.Bluetooth audio
Cancel the requested action.(cancel | stop | exit)
Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack.((line | AV | audio video)
in | AUX | audio video)
Access mobile applications.mobile (apps | applica-
tions)
Make calls.(phone | Blackberry |
iPhone | Mobile)
Access the device connected to your USB port.(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
Run a vehicle health report.vehicle [health] report
302
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback.voice settings
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.[main menu] help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or
stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed
by either apps or applications.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
Note: Mobile Applications, Services and Vehicle health report, is only available in the United
States of America.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 61).
A tone sounds and the following
message appears in the information
display.
Message
Listen
When prompted say the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
voice settings
Followed by either of the following:
Provide more detailed interaction and guidance.interaction mode novice
Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts.interaction mode
advanced
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
303
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
correct?". If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and may ask you to confirm
settings.
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the command; you may still occa-
sionally be asked to confirm settings.
confirmation prompts off
Clarify your voice command with a short question.confirmation prompts on
The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, it may prompt you with
as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
media candidate lists off
Clarify your voice command for media candidates.media candidate lists on
Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
phone candidate lists off
Clarify your voice command for phone candidatesphone candidate lists on
USING SYNC WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cell
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
Answering an incoming call.
Ending a call.
Using privacy mode.
Dialing a number.
Redialing.
Call waiting notification.
Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, see your cell phone's manual
and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
304
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 1000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with
SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired,
do the following:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.
No Phone Paired
Find SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions, such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically
tries to connect with first upon vehicle
start-up) and downloading your
phonebook.
305
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
ActionMessage
Press the OK button.Phone settings
Press the OK button.Bluetooth Devices
Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.
Add Device
Find SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Put the transmission in position
park (P) (automatic transmission) or neutral with the parking brake applied (manual
transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system.
Phone Voice Commands
ActionVoice Command
You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.call (someone |
[[a] name]) This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.Call ___ at Home
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.Call ___ at Work
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.Call ___ in Office
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
306
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
ActionVoice Command
You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.Call ___ on Mobile
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.Call ___ on Other
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Call History
Incoming
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Call History
Missed
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Call History
Outgoing
[Phone] Connec-
tions | [Media]
Connections |
[Bluetooth]
Connections
You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.dial [[a] number]
See the following Phonebook Commands.
([go to] privacy
[on] | transfer to
phone | handsfree
off)
(hold call [on] |
(put | place) call
on hold)
join (call | calls)
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
main menu
See the following Menu Commands.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Phonebook ___
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Phonebook ___ at
Home
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Phonebook ___ at
Work
307
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
ActionVoice Command
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Phonebook ___ in
Office
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
2
Phonebook ___
on Cell
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Phonebook ___ on
Other
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (call | calls) appears you say; call or calls.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; join (call | calls) appears, you must say join followed by either call
or calls.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
([go to] privacy [on]) appears, you can say privacy.
Phonebook Commands
When you ask SYNC to access content, for
example the phonebook name or number,
the requested information appears in the
display to view.
Phone Menu Commands
Voice Command
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
On
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
Off
Voice Command
[Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off
Text Message Inbox
You do not need to say word contained
within brackets for the system to
understand your command.
308
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This command is not available until your cell phone informa-
tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
call (someone | [[a]
name])
dial [[a] number]
When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands:
To confirm the number and initiate the call.dial [[a] number]
To erase the last spoken digit or press the left arrow button.(delete | correct)
To erase all spoken digits or press and hold the left arrow
button.
clear
To end a call press and hold the red phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
Reject the call by pressing and holding
the red phone button.
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, for
example putting a call on hold or joining
calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Active call
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to mute the call.Mute Call
Press the OK button to switch a call from an active hands-
free environment to your cell phone for a more private
conversation.
Privacy
Press the OK button to put an active call on hold.Hold
Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty call or conference call.
Join calls
309
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice
commands to place the second call. Once actively in the
second call, press MENU.
3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until
the following message appears.
Press the OK button.Join calls
To access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through
your phonebook contacts.
2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the contact.
To access your call history log.Call History
1. Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your
call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears
in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Exit the current menu.Return
Accessing Features Through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and
phonebook and sends text messages as
well as access cell phone and system
settings. You can also access advanced
features, for example 911 Assist, Vehicle
Health Report and SYNC Services.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to redial the last number called.Phone Redial
310
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button again to confirm.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you
connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC1.
Call History
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press
the OK button again to confirm.
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Missed calls
The system attempts to automatically re-download your
phonebook and call history each time your cell phone connects
to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-
enabled cell phone supports this feature).
Access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded
phonebook1,2.
Phonebook
If your phonebook has less than 255 entries, they appear
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255
entries, the system will organize them into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to the desired contact.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the contact.
Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text
messages1.
Text messaging
View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your
message notification, change phonebook entries and automat-
ically download your cell phone content among other features1.
Phone settings
Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various
types of information, for example traffic reports and directions3.
SYNC Services
Auotmatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator
following a crash4.
911 Assist
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle3.
Vehicle Health Report
311
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone3.
Mobile Apps
Press the OK button to to exit the phone menu.Exit
1 This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
2 This is a cell phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3 This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.
4 This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only.
Text Messaging
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.
Receiving a Text Message
When a new text message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the information
display indicates you have a new message.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.
Following the notification choose from
the following:
Read or store the text message:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to receive and open the text message.
Press the OK button again and SYNC reads your message
aloud if you are not able to view the message. You can then
also choose to reply or forward the message.
Text msg notify
Take no action, the message goes into your text message
inbox.
Text msg notify
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Press the OK button to have SYNC read the message to you.Read Message | Read
Text Message | Text
Message
312
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Reply or forward the message:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Text msg notify
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.
Reply to sender
Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose Enter
Number.
Forward msg.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when
your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone is compatible,
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages.
Note: Sending a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: You can only have one recipient per
text message.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Text messaging
Select one of the following:
Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To
download the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates the system is downloading your messages.
When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the
inbox.
Download now
Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To
delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text
messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
Delete All Messages?
313
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-
defined set of 15 messages. See the following Pre-defined
text messages table.
Send Text Message?
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to your desired message.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter
a new number.
5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact.
6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you
would like to send the message. The system sends each
text message with the following signature: This message
was sent from my Ford.
Press the OK button to exit the current menu.Return
Pre-defined text messages
Message
Can't talk right now
Call me
Call you later
See u in 10 minutes
See u in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Message
Thanks!
Where R you?
I love you
Too funny :-)
Heavy traffic :-(
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are cell phone-dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust some features. For
example ring tones, text message
notification, modify your phonebook and
set up automatic download.
314
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Phone settings
Select one of the following:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and
roaming status of your connected cell phone.
Phone status
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When
done, press OK again to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You
can choose one of the system ring tones or your cell phone
ring tones.
Set ringtone
Press the OK button and scroll to hear and choose from the
following ring tones.
Set ringer X
Set ringer X
Set ringer X
Phone Ringer
Press the OK button to select th desired ring tone. If your cell
phone supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays
when you choose the phone ringer option.
You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
Press the OK button then select one of the following and
press the OK button again to confirm.
Message Notification On
Message Notification Off
Press the OK button to add more contacts from your
phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell phone.
See your cell phone's manual on how to push contacts.
Add contacts
315
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
Automatically download your phonebook each time your cell
phone connects to SYNC.*
Auto-download
Exit the current menu.Return
*Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent.
**When Auto Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions
saved since your last download.
System Settings
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
cell phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.
In the Phone settings menu, some options you can select include:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.BT Devices
Select one of the following:
See Using SYNC With Your Phone (page 304). *
Add Device
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.Bluetooth On and Off
Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and off.
Press the OK button again.
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices
and turns off all Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired cell phone.Delete
Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK
to confirm.
Exit the current menu.Return
* This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
**You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
316
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.
In the Advanced settings menu, you can select any of the following
Action and DescriptionMessage
Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking
you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off:
Confirmation Prompts
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between
On and Off.
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears
in the display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.
Choose between English, Français and Español. Once
selected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in the
selected language.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display. If you change the language setting, the display
indicates that the system is updating. When complete,
SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
Language
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages or paired devices.
Factory Defaults
Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when
the following message appears in the display.
Restore Defaults?
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example
phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices,
and return the system to the factory default settings.
Master reset
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete.
SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
Install applications you have downloaded.Install Applications
Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button
to confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number.System info
Press the OK button to select.
Exit the current menu.Return
317
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
SYNC Services*: Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such
as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
Vehicle Health Report*: Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report
card of your vehicle.
SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications, for
example Pandora and Stitcher on a
compatible cell phone.
*This is an optional feature and available
in the United States only.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 32). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 175).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
318
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.911 Assist
Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.
On
Off
Off selections include:
Off with reminder: Provides a display
and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start.
Off without reminder: Provides a
display reminder only without a voice
reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
319
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
911 Assist May Not Work If
Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
Vehicle diagnostic information
Scheduled maintenance
Open recalls and Field Service Actions
Items noted during vehicle inspections
by an authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
You can run a vehicle health report after
your vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds. Choose one of the following
options.
320
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle's
diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it
combines with scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items
that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
vehicle [health] report
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.vehicle [health] report
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to and select on or off.Report Interval
Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
health report at certain mileage intervals.*
Scroll to select between 5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals.
Select your desire option and press the OK button.
Mileage Interval
Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your
vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford
where it combines with scheduled maintenance information,
open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection
items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Run Report
Exit the current menu.Return
*You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
321
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions
& Information (TDI) (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Using SYNC With
Your Phone (page 304).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of errors, changes in roads, traffic
conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
322
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Services
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.
Once you are connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.(what are my (options |
choices) | what can I say
| [available] commands)
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.Help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say either; options
or choices.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; what are my (options | choices) appears, you must say; what are
my, followed by either, options or choices.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(what can I say [available] commands) appears, you can say, what can I say commands.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Services 1. Press the OK button. The display indicates the system is
connecting.
2. Press the OK button again. SYNC initiates the call to the
Services portal.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow the prompts to
request the desired service, for example traffic or direc-
tions.
323
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
To receive directions to a location. Once you select your
destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and
sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is
complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive
audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward
your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Select your destination,
the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates
a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and
visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destina-
tion.
Business search
You can also say the following:
To find the closest business or type of business to your loca-
tion, within business search.
Search near me
If you need further assistance in finding a location at any time
within a Directions or Business search and need to speak with
a live operator.
Operator
The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections.
The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when
it has difficulty matching your voice request. Operator Assist
is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/
support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the
route updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends
a new route to your vehicle.
Yes *
* During an active route.
324
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To disconnect from SYNC services, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
From the SYNC Services main menu, or press and hold the
phone button on the steering wheel.
Goodbye
SYNC Services quick tips
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, for example work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or a news
category. You can learn more about personalization by logging
onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC
Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip, say your
voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
Portable
You can even access your account outside your vehicle. Just
use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and
Directions features do not function properly but information
services and the 411 connect and text message features are
available.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. Once an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
325
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYNC applications
Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available
applications and select your desired app.
Mobile Apps
Press the OK button to search for new app's.Find New Apps
Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app cannot be found, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Accessing an App's Menu
Once an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC,
you can press the voice button and speak commands specific
to the app, for example, Playlist Road Trip.
Mobile Apps
You can also say the following:
To discover the available voice commands.Help
326
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
SYNC prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC.
Mobile Apps
SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.List mobile apps
SYNC searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-
compatible mobile apps.
Find New Apps
At any time you can say the name of a mobile app to start
the mobile app on SYNC.
<the name of an app>
SYNC lists the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC.
<the name of an app>
help
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
327
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYNC applications
Press the OK button.Mobile Apps
Select the specific app and press the OK button.App Settings
If push notifications are supported, this setting is listed. Select
to enable or disable the feature as required.
All Apps
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
There are three possible statuses:
Action and DescriptionMessage
The system has detected a new app requiring authorization
or a general permissions update is required.
Update Needed
No update is required.Up-To-Date
The system is trying to receive an update.Updating...
If an update is required and you want to request it update
manually, for example when in a Wi-Fi hotspot.
Request Update
You can disable automatic updates in the settings menu.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile Apps on SYNC.
Disable Updates
328
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
USING SYNC WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports the
following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 297).
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands. See Media voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 297).
Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to enter the media menu.Menu
Press the OK button.Browse device
Press the OK button.USB
Depending on how many digital media files are on your
connected device, the following message may appear in the
radio display. When indexing is complete, the screen returns
to the Play menu.
Indexing
329
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
Select one of the following:
Play all
Artist
Albums
Genres
Playlists
Tracks
Browse USB
Similar music
Exit the current menu.Return
What's Playing?
When a track is playing, you can ask the
system to tell you what is currently playing.
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track,
and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell
you what track is playing.
((who's | who is) this |
who plays this | (what's
| what is) playing [now]
| (what | which) (song |
track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing |
(what's | what is) this)
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.
330
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
Autoplay Off
Autoplay [on]
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
pause
play
1,2
play [album] [by [artist]]
Play all
1,2
play [artist]
1,2
play [genre]
3
[Play] Next Folder
[play] next track
1,2
play [playlist]
3
[Play] Previous Folder
[play] previous track
1,2
play [song | track | title | file]
Voice command
1,2
Refine album ___
repeat (track | song) [on]
repeat off
1,2
(browse | search | show) album
1,2
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)
1,2
(browse | search | show) all (genre
| genres)
1,2
(browse | search | show) all (song |
songs | title | titles | file | files | track
| tracks)
shuffle [all] [on]
shuffle off
[play] (similar music | more like this)
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
1 <name> is a dynamic listing, meaning that
it could be the name of anything, such as
a group, artist or song.
2 This voice command is not available until
indexing is complete.
3 This voice command is only available in
folder mode.
331
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Voice Command Guide
Action and DescriptionVoice command
Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing.
Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish
before the system plays any of your music.*
Autoplay [on]
The system searches all the data from your indexed music
and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music. You
can only play genres of music that are present in the GENRE
metadata tags that you have on your digital media player.
(browse | search | show)
all (genre | genres)
play [genre]
The system compiles a playlist and then plays music similar
to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed
metadata information.
[play] (similar music |
more like this)
The system searches for specific artist information from the
music indexed through the USB port.
(browse | search | show)
all (artist | artists)
The system searches for specific track information from the
music indexed through the USB port.
(browse | search | show)
all (song | songs | title |
titles | file | files | track |
tracks)
The system searches for specific album information from the
music indexed through the USB port.
(browse | search | show)
album
The system searches for specific artist information from the
music indexed through the USB port.
play [artist]
The system searches for specific track information from the
music indexed through the USB port.
play [song | track | title |
file]
The system searches for specific album information from the
music indexed through the USB port.
play [album] [by [artist]]
This allows you to make your previous command more
specific. For example, if you asked to search and play all music
by a certain artist, you could then say, refine album and
choose a specific album from the list to view. If you then
select Play, the system only plays music from that specific
album.
Refine
*Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
332
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Bluetooth Audio Command Guide
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
pause
play
Voice command
[play] next track
[play] previous track
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music, for
example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,
and to add, connect or delete devices.
Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to enter the media menu.Menu
Select one of the following:
Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlist, track, similar
music or play all music. You can also choose to Explore USB
to view the supported digital music files on your playing
device.
Menu
Select and play music from your USB port, auxiliary input jack
or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
Browse device
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to access music plugged into your USB
port. You can also plug in devices to charge them (if
supported by your device). Once connected, the system
indexes any readable media files.1
USB
Press the OK button. This is a phone-dependent feature that
allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetooth-
enabled phone. If supported by your device, you can press
seek to play the previous or next track.
Bluetooth audio
Press the OK button to select and play music from your
portable music player over your vehicle's speakers.2
Line In
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your
Autoplay settings. Once you turn these selections on, they
remain on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the
previous or next track.3
Media Player Settings
333
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to shuffle available media files in the
current playlist. To shuffle all media tracks, you must select
Play All in the play menu and then select Shuffle.
Shuffle
Press the OK button to repeat any song.Repeat
Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to listen to music
processed during indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the
indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your
music.4
Autoplay
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
Mobile Apps
Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as
Advanced menu listings.
Settings
Press OK to exit the media menu.Exit
1The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs
to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay
is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum
indexing file size.
2If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data
and music separately.
3Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately
4Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media. If there
are media files, you have the following
options:
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
334
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to enter the media menu.Menu
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the
display.
Play all
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in
flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. If there
are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists them
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255,
the system categorizes them alphabetically.
Artist
1. Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255
indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes
them alphabetically.
Albums
1. Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button.
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the
genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
Genres
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button.
Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat-file mode.
If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them
alphabetically.
Playlists
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button.
335
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Action and DescriptionMessage
Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your
tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
Tracks
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button.
Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media content
which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not
visible.
Browse USB
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.
Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB
port. The system uses the metadata information of each song
to compile a playlist for you.*
Similar Music
1. Press the OK button.
2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins
playing. This feature does not include tracks with incom-
plete metadata information. Press the OK button.
Exit the current menu.Return
*With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not
available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these
tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice
recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items
into any unpopulated metadata tag.
System Settings
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete a device as turn
the Bluetooth feature on and off.
336
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to enter the media menu.Menu
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Bluetooth Devices
Select one of the following:
Pair more devices to the system.*
Add Device
1. Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the
display, press the OK button again.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your
phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the
display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.**
Bluetooth On and Off
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection, press the OK button.
Delete a paired media device.DEL DEVICE
1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Delete all previously paired devices.Delete All
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Exit the current menu.Return
*This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
**Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth
features.
337
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.
In the Advanced settings menu, you can select any of the following
Action and DescriptionMessage
Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or
ask you for a specific action.
Confirmation Prompts
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection, press the OK button. SYNC takes you
back to the Advanced menu.
Choose from the available languages. The displays and
prompts are in the selected language.
Language
1. Press the OK button and scroll through the available
languages.
2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears
in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages and paired devices.
Factory Defaults
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in
the display, press the OK button again to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices
will be deleted and the system will return to the factory
default settings.
Master reset
Download available software applications through the USB
port.
Install Applications
Exit the current menu.Return
338
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
SYNC TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts. If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
339
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
340
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
341
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate your
account on the website.
You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.
I received a text that I did
not activate Vehicle Health
Report.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.
When you register your
account, you must choose a
preferred dealer. If it already
lists a dealer, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in, change it
back to your preferred
dealer, and retrieve the
report.
The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.
I am unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.
Update your cellular number
in your account on the
website.
This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
Bad signal strength.
I am unable to submit a
report.
Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
You did not register your
phone correctly on the
website.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is
registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate this
phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker
active.
I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Direc-
tions and Information.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recog-
nizes you by your phone
number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SYNCMyRide
account.
342
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
343
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
344
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
345
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android OS that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle drive
to not be found again if you
have not turned off
bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
346
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
347
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
SYNC
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E162500
MessageItem
PhoneA
NavigationB
SettingsC
HomeD
InformationE
EntertainmentF
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cell
phone, entertainment, information and
system settings. The corners display active
modes within the menus, for example; your
cell phone's status.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
Note: You can access the entertainment
features for 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off, and no doors are opened.
348
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Phone
Quick Dial
Phonebook
History
Messaging
Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
Message
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
SETTINGS
E142607
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Clock
Display
Sound
Vehicle
Settings
Help
HOME
E142613
Press to access the home
screen.
Note: Depending on your vehicles option
package and software, the screens may vary
in appearance from the descriptions in this
section. The features may also be limited
depending on the market. Check with an
authorized dealer for availability.
INFORMATION
E142608
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Services
Travel Link
Alerts
Calendar
Apps
349
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
Message
AM
FM
SIRIUS
Message
CD
USB
BT Stereo
SD Card
Line In
Using the Audio Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Switch the media features on or off.Power
Adjust the volume of playing media.Vol:
Use as you normally would in media modes.Seek
Use as you normally would in media modes.Tune
Eject a CD from the entertainment system.Eject
Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again,
or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.
Display
Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media
modes.
Source
Adjust the settings for:Sound
Bass
Treble
Midrange
Balance
Fade
DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume.
350
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionControl
Adjust the volume of playing media.VOL
Use as you normally would in media modes.Seek
Press to start a voice session. Press again to interrupt a voice
prompt and begin speaking. Press and hold to end an active
voice session.
Voice
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek/call accept
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek/call reject
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour
or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not
use detergent or any type of solvent to
clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available:
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm
EST.
United States: 1-888-270-1055
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Note: Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Do not operate media devices if the
power cables are broken or damaged.
351
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Make sure the power cables do not
interfere with the safe operation of your
vehicle's controls or affect your safe
driving abilities.
Some SYNC functions are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system are restricted
from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
Screens crowded with information, for
example:
Point of Interest reviews and ratings
SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores
Movie times
Ski conditions.
Any action that requires keyboard use,
for example: entering a navigation
destination or editing information.
All lists are limited, for example: phone
contacts.
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Speed-restricted Features
Pairing a cell phoneCell phone
Adding or editing phonebook contacts
Phone contacts and recent phone call entries
Enabling Valet ModeSystem Functionality
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
Adding or editing wallpaperPhotos and Graphics
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book or Avoid Area entries
352
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Privacy Information
When you connect a cell phone to SYNC,
the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cell phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may
contain data about your cell phone book,
text messages (read and unread), and call
history, including history of calls when your
cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a media
device, the system creates and retains an
index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development
log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent system activity. The log profile and
other system data may be used to improve
the system and help diagnose any
problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log remain in your
vehicle unless you delete them, and are
generally accessible only in your vehicle
when your cell phone or media player is
connected. If you no longer plan to use the
system or your vehicle, we recommend you
carry out a Master Reset to erase all stored
information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described without consent,
a court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911
Assist®, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
Using Voice Commands
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status
bar indicating the status of the voice
command session (such as Listening,
Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands
E142599
The following voice commands
can be said at any time during a
voice command session.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
main menu
List of commands
(what are my (options | choices) | what
can I say | [available] commands)
Next page
Previous page
Go back
353
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
(cancel | stop | exit)
[main menu] help
You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example, where
(cancel | stop | exit) appears you say;
cancel or stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands
that appear outside of open and close
brackets. For example, what are my
(options | choices) appears, you must say;
what are my, followed by either options or
choices.
You do not need to say words that appear
within square brackets. For example, for
what can I say [available] commands
appears, you can say what can I say
commands.
What Can I Say?
During a voice command session, press the help icon ? in the lower left status bar
of the screen, and when prompted say one of the following:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
This will provide an on-screen listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice command
session.
(what are my (options |
choices) | what can I say
| [available] commands)
This will provide a spoken listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice command
session.
voice settings help
Helpful Hints
Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken voice commands.
After pressing the voice command icon,
wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a voice
command. Any voice command spoken
prior to this will not register with the
system.
Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice command icon.
Accessing a List of Available Voice
Commands
To access a list of available voice
commands you can do either of the
following.
354
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Using the touchscreen, press:
Message
Settings
Help
Voice Command List
Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:
Voice Commands
Audio list of commands
Bluetooth audio list of commands
Browse list of commands
CD list of commands
List of commands
*
Navigation list of commands
Phone list of commands
Radio list of commands
SD card list of commands
*
Sirius satellite list of commands
*
Travel link list of commands
USB list of commands
Voice instructions list of commands
Voice settings list of commands
voice settings help
* These voice commands are only available
when your vehicle is fitted with a
navigation system, and the navigation
system SD card is in the SD card slot.
Voice Command Settings
These allow you to customize the level of
system interaction, help and feedback. The
system defaults to standard interaction
that uses candidate lists and confirmation
prompts as these provide the highest level
of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode
provides detailed interaction and
guidance. Advanced mode has less
audible interaction and more tone
prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: The system
uses these short questions to confirm
your voice command. If turned off, the
system simply makes a best guess as
to what you requested. The system
may still occasionally ask you to
confirm a voice command.
Phone and Media Candidate Lists:
Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The
system creates these lists when it has
the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
Using the touchscreen, press the
settings icon, then press:
Message
Voice settings
Voice Control
Select from the following:
Interaction Mode
Confirmation Prompts
Media Candidate Lists
Phone Candidate Lists
Voice Control Volume
355
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:
Voice command
interaction mode novice
interaction mode advanced
confirmation prompts on
confirmation prompts off
phone candidate lists on
phone candidate lists off
Voice command
media candidate lists on
media candidate lists off
voice settings help
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
The voice command system has a dual
mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays a
list of candidates generated during a voice
command session. For example, when
entering a street address or trying to call a
contact from a cell phone paired to the
system.
SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
356
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
MessageItem
ClockA
DisplayB
SoundC
VehicleD
SettingsE
HelpF
Clock
Under this menu, you can set the clock,
access and adjust the display, sound and
vehicle settings as well as access settings
for specific modes or the help feature.
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Press the + or - to adjust the time.Clock
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such
as 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate GPS time synchroniza-
tion and have the system automatically update new time
zones (if equipped with navigation).
You can also turn the outside air temperature display off and
on. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next to
the time and date.
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicles GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to
update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for the
update to display the correct time.
Display
E142607
You can adjust the display using the
touchscreen or the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Then select from the following:
357
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
Allows you to turn the display off. It also allows you to set
the screen to a certain brightness or have the system auto-
matically change based on the outside light level.
Mode
If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning
the display's Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the
Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.
Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.Edit Wallpaper
E142599
To make adjustments using the voice
button, press the button and when
prompted, say:
Voice command
Display Settings
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank
(black) image on the display.
The system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
E142607
To access, press:
To upload your photos, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.Display Photos from
Phonebook
358
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions will display:
Compatible file formats are as follows:
.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp.
Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
Sound
E142607
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Settings
Sound
Then select from the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
Message
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
DSP
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
these sound settings.
Vehicle
E142607
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Settings
Vehicle
Then select from the following:
Vehicle Health Report
Camera Settings
Enable Valet Mode
Vehicle Health Report
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Vehicle Health
359
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
Turn on and off and set the mileage interval at which you
would like to receive the reports. Press the ? for more
information on these selections.
Automatic Reminders
To run the vehicle health report immediately.Run Vehicle Health
Report Now
You can find more information on Vehicle Health Report in this chapter.
Camera Settings
This menu allows you to access settings
for your rear view camera.
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park Aids
Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter. See
Parking Aids (page 142).
Enable Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, enter 3681 and the system
unlocks.
E142607
360
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.Enable Valet Mode
After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the
PIN again.
Continue
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
System
Then select from the following:
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or
French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button
Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC
format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Master reset
361
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice Control
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Settings
Voice Control
Then select from the following:
Novice interaction mode provides more detailed interaction
and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly
heard or understood your request.
Confirmation Prompts
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system
may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the systems voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
Media Player
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Media Player
Then select from the following:
362
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you
to listen to music during the indexing process. When this
feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to
the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote® Database
Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote® Mgmt
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied cover
art for your music files. This overrides any art from your device.
This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Navigation
Then select from the following:
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route as
your preferred route. This route will be displayed first.
Route Preferences
363
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system will only
calculate a single route. This speeds up your destination entry
process.
Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecolo-
gical route. This may incur a time penalty.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid toll roads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province
information.
Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns or allow
you to accept or decline an alternative route.
Traffic Preferences
Have the system automatically alert you to traffic concerns
that occur on your route.
Have the system display areas where road work occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving condi-
tions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the
road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visib-
ility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements.
Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns.
Turn traffic alert notifications on or off.
Have the system display accident icons.
364
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned
navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
Phone
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Phone
Then select from the following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside
your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message noti-
fications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your
vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 395).
911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech or silent.
Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
365
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You
can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when roaming, or query on
connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(such as personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also
gain access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside your
vehicle, your phone supports personal area
networking and if you park outside a
wireless hotspot.
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Wireless &amp; Internet
Then select from the following:
Wi-Fi Network (Client) ModeWi-Fi Settings
Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure
you turn it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network
Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal
strength. You can also choose to search for a network,
connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive
more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode
366
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when
turned on. This forms the local area network within your
vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and
internet browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings
Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as
the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List
Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile
broadband connection to access the internet. (You must turn
on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer
before connecting it to the system.) This screen allows you
to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile
broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband settings
may not display if the device is already on.) You can select
the following: Country, Carrier, Phone Number, User Name
and Password.
USB Mobile Broadband
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you
your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as
favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered
trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to change order and have the system
either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile
broadband or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
E142626
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
E142607
367
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Help
Then select from the following:
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications installed
on your system.
View Software Licenses
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is
moving.
Driving Restrictions
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 395).
911 Assist
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to save
up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there
is an emergency. Select Edit to access your phonebook and
then select the desired contacts. The numbers then appear
as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The
ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist
call process.
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List
You can also access Help using the voice
commands. The system provides
allowable voice commands for the current
mode.
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
help
368
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
E161892
Message and DescriptionMessage
AM 1 and AM ASTA
FM 1, FM 2 and FM ASTB
SIRIUSC
USBD
BT StereoE
Touch this button to scroll down
for more options, for example
SD Card and A/V In
F
These buttons change with the
media mode you are in.
G
Radio memory presets.H
Note: Some features may not be available
in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Browsing Device Content
When listening to audio on a device, you
can browse through other devices without
having to change sources. For example, if
you are currently listening to audio on an
SD card, you can browse all the artists that
are stored on your USB device.
E142599
Browse Within Devices
Press the voice button and when
prompted say one of the following:
Voice command
*
Browse
**
Browse <league> games
**
Browse <Sirius category> channels
Browse SD card
**
Browse Sirius channel guide
369
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
Browse USB
Help
* If you only say browse, you can then say
any commands in the following chart.
**These commands are only usable if you
have an active subscription to SIRIUS
satellite radio.
Browse
Voice command
*
<League> Games
*
<Sirius category> channels
**
SD card
*
Sirius Channel Guide
**
USB
Help
* This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.
** For more commands in SD card or USB
mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"
section of this chapter.
The voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command. For example, if you are listening
to music on a USB device, then want to
switch to a satellite radio channel, simply
press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls and say the name of the
SIRIUS station (for example, "the
Highway"). The following voice commands
are available at the top level of the voice
session no matter which current audio
source you are listening to (for example a
USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio).
Note: This is only available when your
MyFord Touch system language is set to
North American English.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
<87.9-107.9>
<530-1710>
*
<Channel name>
AM <530-1710>
FM <87.9-107.9>
**
play [album] [by [artist]]
**
play [artist]
**
play [genre]
**
play [playlist]
**
play [song | track | title | file]
Play <name>
Play <name (song or album)> by
<artist name>
370
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
*
Sirius <0-223>
*
Sports games
* This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.
** The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional. For
example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this
is the same as the voice command, "Play
[artist] <name>".
AM/FM Radio
E142611
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen
to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets,
just touch the AM or FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The
light on the button illuminates when the
feature is on. HD Radio allows you to
receive radio broadcasts digitally, where
available, providing free, crystal-clear
sound. See HD Radio information later in
this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong
AM or FM radio station. The light on the
button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings
for:
Message
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You can
then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display
This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.
AST
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.
TAG Button
This feature is available when HD Radio is
on, and allows you to tag a song to
download later. When you select On, TAG
appears on-screen when HD Radio is
active. You can touch TAG to save the
information of the song that is playing.
When you plug in your portable music
371
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
player, the information transfers, if
supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to
remind you of the songs you would like to
download. See HD Radio information later
in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the
desired station number. Touch Enter when
you are done.
HD Radio Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo either blinks when acquiring
a digital station, and then stays solid when
digital audio is playing, or is grey when
acquiring a digital station, and then
changes to orange when digital audio is
playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature
is on.
372
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
To turn the feature on and use it, select AM or FM and the select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Options
TAG Button
When you hear a song you, select:On
The system automatically saves the song's information and
transfers it to your portable music player (if supported) when
you connect it to the system. The system automatically
transfers the tag to your player (if already connected) and a
pop-up confirms the transfer.
TAG
When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the
tags appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to
tag up to approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that
support tagging, see www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on,
although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast.
Scan
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3
memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio
plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Memory presets
Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle
is outside the stations reception area.
373
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or .
374
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
Direct Tune
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_experi-
ences
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_experi-
ences
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
This selection disables HD2-
HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when you press.
Scan
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Radio
Then any of the following:
<87.9-107.9>
1
<<87.9-107.9> HD>
<530-1710>
AM
AM <530-1710>
AM autoset
AM autoset preset <#>
375
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
AM preset <#>
2
Browse
FM
FM <87.9-107.9>
1
FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>
FM autoset
FM autoset preset <#>
FM preset <#>
FM 1
FM 1 preset <#>
FM 2
FM 2 preset <#>
1
HD <#>
Preset <#>
Radio off
Radio on
Set PTY
3
Tune
Help
1 If available.
2 If you have said browse, see the Browse
chart later in this section.
3 If you have said tune, see the following
Tune chart.
Tune
Voice command
<530-1710>
<87.9-107.9>
*
<87.9-107.9> HD <#>
AM
AM <530-1710>
AM autoset
AM autoset preset <#>
AM preset <#>
*
FM
FM <87.9-107.9>
FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>
FM autoset
FM autoset preset <#>
FM preset <#>
FM 1
FM 1 preset <#>
FM 2
FM 2 preset <#>
*
HD <#>
Preset <#>
Help
* If available.
376
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
E142611
To turn the feature on press the lower
left corner of the touchscreen, and then
select:
Message
SIRIUS
Memory Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding
one of the memory preset areas. There is
a brief mute while the radio saves the
channel. Sound returns when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a
favorite. The system alerts you when it
plays again on any channel.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You
can replay approximately 45 minutes of
audio as long as you have remained tuned
to the current station. Changing stations
erases the previous audio.
While in replay mode:
Press and release the seek buttons to
hear the previous or next song.
Press and hold the seek buttons to
reverse or fast forward in the current
track.
Press play or pause to play or pause
the audio.
Press Replay to return to live audio if
you have been using the feature to
replay audio.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of channels.
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
Message
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Set Category for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You can
then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.
Parental Lockout
This allows you to lock and unlock
channels, change or reset your PIN or
unlock all channels. To use this feature,
you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.
377
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Artist/Title/Team Alerts
This feature allows you to select Artists,
Titles and Teams that you would like the
system to alert you to when they are
playing on other channels. Press Edit Alerts
to delete or turn off alerts. You can also
set all alerts to on or off. When an alert
appears on the screen, you can choose to
Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or
to Disable Alerts. If you are listening to a
sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so that the system can alert you
when they are playing on a satellite radio
channel.
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor
Company shall not be responsible for Alert
feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
SIRIUS requires this number when
communicating with you about your
account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the
desired satellite channel number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all
available stations. Scroll to see more
categories. Touch the station you want to
listen to.
You can also select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Touch this button if you want to skip this channel.Skip
Touch this button if you do not want anyone to listen to this
channel.
Lock
Touch this button to see song and artists on other stations.Title
Touch this button to see song and artists on other stations.Artist
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
378
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX).
To access your ESN, touch the bottom
left corner of the touchscreen, then
select:
Message
SIRIUS
Options
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
379
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to resolve subscription
issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the chan-
nels available for your vehicle.
Subscription Updated
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands
E142599
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite
radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "", then any of the following
commands.
380
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
SIRIUS
Then any of the following:
<Channel Name>
Preset <#>
SAT
SAT preset <#>
SAT 1
SAT 1 preset <#>
SAT 2
SAT 2 preset <#>
SAT 3
SAT 3 preset <#>
Sirius <0-223>
Sirius off
Sirius on
*
Sports game
*
Tune
Help
* If you have said, sports game, see the
following Sports game chart.
** If you have said, tune, see the following
Tune chart.
Sports Game
Voice command
Tune to the <college name> game
Tune to the <team city> game
Tune to the <team city> <team name>
game
Tune to the <team name> game
Help
Tune
Voice command
<Channel Name>
Preset <#>
SAT
SAT 1
SAT 1 preset <#>
SAT 2
SAT 2 preset <#>
SAT 3
SAT 3 preset <#>
Sirius <0-223>
Help
SD Card Slot and USB Port
The SD card slot and USB port are located
in the Media Hub. See Media Hub (page
298).
381
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 405).
E142619
The SD card slot is located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press the
lower left corner of the touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E142621
The USB ports are located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press the
lower left corner of the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
In order to playback video from your iPod
or iPhone, you must have a special
combination USB/RCA composite video
cable (which you can buy from Apple).
When you connect the cable to your iPod
or iPhone, plug the other end into both the
RCA jacks and the USB port.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.
E142611
Insert your device and select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you can
then select from the following options:
USB
SD Card
This feature replays the currently playing song or album.Repeat
382
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
Touch this button to play music on the selected album or
folder in random order.
Shuffle
This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is
currently playing.
Similar Music
Touch this button to see disc information, for example current
track, artist name, album and genre.
More Info
Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.Options
Sound
Sound settings allows you to adjust settings for:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated
Volume
Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media
Player. See Settings (page 356).
Media Player Settings
Displays software and firmware information about the
currently connected media device.
Device Information
Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (for example adding or
removing tracks) to make sure you have the latest voice
commands available for all media on the device.
Update Media Index
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
383
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Browse
This feature allows you to view the
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, for example genre,
artist or album.
If you want to view song information, for
example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album,
and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
To hear how the system pronounces the current band and
song. This can be helpful when using voice commands to
make sure the system correctly plays your request.
Whats Playing
Playing Video from Your Device
To access and play video from your device,
your vehicle's transmission must be in park
(P) with the ignition in accessory mode.
See Starting and Stopping the Engine
(page 104).
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
SD card
Then any of the following:
*
Browse
[play] next track
pause
play
play [album] [by [artist]]
play all
Voice command
play [artist]
Play audiobook <name>
Play author <name>
Play composer <name>
Play folder <name>
play [genre]
*
Play movie <name>
*
Play music video <name>
play [playlist]
Play podcast <name>
Play podcast episode <name>
[play] (similar music | more
like this)
play [song | track | title | file]
*
Play TV show <name>
""**
Play TV show episode
<name>
""**
Play video podcast <name>
384
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
""**
Play video podcast episode
<name>
""**
Play video playlist <name>
[play] previous track
repeat [all | folder | track |
song] off
Repeat off
Repeat one
shuffle [all] [on]
Shuffle album
shuffle off
What's this?
Help
* If you have said you would like to browse
your USB or SD card, the system prompts
you to specify what you would like to
browse. See the following Browse chart.
** These commands are only available in
USB mode and are device-dependent.
Browse
Voice command
Album <name>
All albums
All artists
All audiobooks
All authors
All composers
All folders
All genres
Voice command
*
All movies
*
All movies
*
All music videos
All playlists
All podcasts
All songs
*
All TV shows
*
All video playlists
*
All video podcasts
*
All videos
Artist <name>
Audiobook <name>
Author <name>
Composer <name>
Folder <name>
Genre <name>
Playlist <name>
Podcast <name>
*
TV show <name>
*
Video <name>
*
Video playlist <name>
*
Video podcast <name>
Help
* This command is only available in USB
mode and is device-dependent.
385
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod,
Zune, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod
or iPhone, you must have a special
combination USB/RCA composite video
cable (which you can buy from Apple).
When you connect the cable to your iPod
or iPhone, plug the other end into both the
RCA jacks and the USB port.
Bluetooth Audio
The system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
E142611
To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Message
BT Stereo
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Next song
play
pause
[play] previous track
A/V Inputs
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, for example the
center console or the glove box,
when your vehicle is moving. Hard objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable
music player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
386
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
E142622
The A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (for example
gaming systems or a personal camcorder)
by connecting RCA cords (not included)
to these input jacks. The jacks are yellow,
red and white and are located either
behind a small access door on the
instrument panel or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an
auxiliary input jack to play music from your
portable music player over your vehicle's
speakers. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3.5
millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left
A/V input jacks (red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select A/V In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
make sure that your portable music player
is designed for use with headphones and
that it is fully charged. You also need an
audio extension cable with stereo male
1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at one
end and a RCA jack at the other.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and
portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in park
(P).
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the
adapter in one of the two left A/V input
jacks (white or red) inside the center
console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select a tuned FM station.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.
(You should hear audio from your
portable music player although it may
be low.)
7. Adjust the sound on your portable
music player until it reaches the level
of the FM station by switching back and
forth between the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod
or iPhone, you must have a special
combination USB/RCA composite video
cable (which you can buy from Apple).
When you connect the cable to your iPod
or iPhone, plug the other end into both the
RCA jacks and the USB port.
Troubleshooting
Do not connect the audio input jack to
a line level output. The jack only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume
control.
Do not set the portable music player's
volume level higher than is necessary
to match the volume of the FM radio
as this causes distortion and reduces
sound quality.
If the music sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable music
player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the
batteries in the portable media player.
Control the portable media player in
the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
does not provide control (for example
Play or Pause) over the attached
portable media player.
387
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
MessageItem
PhoneA
Quick DialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC®. Once you pair your cell
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phones
functionality.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
Answering an incoming call.
Ending a call.
Using privacy mode.
Dialing a number.
Redialing.
Call waiting notification.
Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phones
compatibility, see your cell phones user
manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
388
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the
phone features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your cell phone in a
hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in position P.
Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Add phone
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phones manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phones display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: Move the gearshift lever to park (P).
Switch your vehicle ignition and the radio
on.
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cell phone is in the correct mode.
See your device's manual if necessary.
389
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Settings
Select BT Device
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.Add Device
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phones display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
call [[a] name]
dial [[a] number]
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Message
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Message
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
390
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on the
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the
on-screen numerical pad to enter a
number and place a call. During an
active call, you can also choose to:
Message
Mute Call
Hold Call
Privacy
Join Calls
End
Quick Dial
Select and call contacts stored in your
phonebook contacts and call history folder.
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any
contacts in your previously downloaded
phonebook. The system places the entries
in alphabetical categories summarized at
the top of the screen.
To turn on contact picture settings, if
your device supports this feature,
select:
Message
Phone
Settings
Manage Phonebook
Display Photos from Phonebook
On
Certain smartphones may support
transferring street addresses when listed
with phonebook contact information. If
your cell phone supports this feature, you
can select and use these addresses as
destinations and save them as favorites.
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
cell phone to SYNC, you can access any
previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to your
Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone does not support
downloading call history using Bluetooth,
SYNC keeps track of calls made with the
SYNC system.
Messaging
Send text messages using the touchscreen.
See Text messaging later in this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone
settings, for example turning Bluetooth on
and off, managing your phonebook and
more. See Phone settings later in this
section.
391
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3.1 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your cell phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, for
example LOL.
Touch the top left corner of the display,
then select:
Message
Phone
Messaging
Then any of the following:
Message
Listen (speaker icon)
Dial
Send Text
View
Delete
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3.1 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
To compose and send a text message, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Messaging
Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.Send Text
Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create
a message on your own.
Edit Text
Sends the message as it is.Send
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the
message list.
392
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Text Message Options
Message
Ill call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, Ill be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
Im on my way.
Im running a few minutes late.
Im ahead of schedule, so Ill be there
early.
Im outside.
Ill call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Message
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3.1 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name
and ID, if supported by your cell phone.
You can select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
To view the text message.View
For SYNC to read the
message to you.
Listen
To call the contact.Dial
To exit the screen.Ignore
Phone Settings
To enter the phone settings menu select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Settings
Then any of the
following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
To turn Bluetooth off or on.Bluetooth
393
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Action and DescriptionMessage
If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not
ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
Do Not Disturb
Turn the 911 Assist feature on and off. See Information
(page 395).
911 Assist
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call.
Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently paired
cell phones ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent
notification.
Phone Ringer
Select a text message notification, if supported by your cell
phone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-
speech or silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your
internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
To access features such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your cell
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
To have the system alert you when your cell phone is in
roaming mode.
Roaming Warning
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
call [[a] name]
call (<first_name> | [<first_name>]
<last_name>)
call (<first_name> | [<first_name>]
<last_name>) <location>
Voice command
Call voicemail
dial [[a] number]
(do not disturb off | disturb me)
do not disturb [on]
forward (text | [text] message)
1
(go to hands free | transfer to car)
1
(hold call off | take call off hold)
1
(hold call [on] | place call on hold)
394
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
1
join (call | calls)
(listen to | read) [[text] message |
line] [number] <msg_num>
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
2
[text] (messages | message)
1
mute call [on]
(pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) | add [a] phone)
1
([go to] privacy [on] | transfer to
phone)
reply to (text | [text] message)
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
Voice command
1
(mute [call] off | Unmute [call])
Help
1 These commands are only available
during an active call.
2 If you say messages, see the following
additional commands.
Voice command
call [[a] name]
forward (text | [text] message)
(listen to | read) [[text] message | line]
[number] <msg_num>
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
reply to (text | [text] message)
Help
INFORMATION
E188418
395
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
MessageItem
SYNC ServicesA
Travel LinkB
AlertsC
CalendarD
AppsE
Where Am I?F
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Phone (page 388).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
396
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
Voice Commands
E142599
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow
the voice prompts to request the
desired service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
the Touchscreen
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on your
touchscreen.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate
an outgoing call to SYNC Services
using your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired
Service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services,
say "Directions" or "Business search".
To find the closest business or type of
business to your current location, just
say "Business search" and then
"Search near me". If you need further
assistance in finding a location you can
say "Operator" at any time within a
Directions or Business search to speak
with a live operator. The system may
prompt you to speak with an operator
when it has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can
assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential
addresses by street address or by
name or specific street intersections.
Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Destination. After the route download
is finished, the phone call automatically
ends.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
information display, in the status bar
of your touchscreen system and on the
SYNC Services screen. You also receive
driving instructions from audible
prompts.
When on an active route, you can
select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls
or voice commands to view the Route
Summary Turn List or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice
guidance on or off, cancel the route or
update the route.
397
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say,
"Yes" when prompted and the system
delivers a new route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
SYNC Services downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the
route and provides driving instructions.
See Navigation (page 405).
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Tips
You can person-
alize your Services
feature to provide
quicker access to
your most used or
favorite informa-
Personalizing
tion. You can save
address points,
such as work or
home. You can also
save favorite
information like
sports teams, for
example Detroit
Tips
Lions, or a news
category. You can
learn more about
personalization by
logging onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Press the voice
button at any time
(while connected
to SYNC Services)
to interrupt a voice
prompt or an audio
clip (such as a
sports report) and
say your voice
command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is
associated with
your Bluetooth-
enabled cellular
phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle
Portable
Identification
Number). You can
pair and connect
your phone to any
vehicle equipped
with SYNC Services
and continue
enjoying your
personalized
services.
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
systems), press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
398
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Services
Voice command
Cancel route
Navigation voice off
Navigation voice on
Route status
Route summary
Update route
Help
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by Sirius Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link,
it can help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,
view the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic
incidents on your route, nearby your
vehicles current location or near any of
your favorite places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at
stations close to your vehicles location or
on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie
theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby
weather, current weather, or the five day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map
to see the weather map, which can show
storms, radar information, charts and
winds. Select Area to select from a listing
of weather locations.
399
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and
schedules from a variety of sports. You can
also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes
when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions
for a specific area.
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
Sirius Travel Link
Voice command
5-day weather forecast
Fuel prices
Movie listings
*
Sports headlines
*
Sports schedules
*
Sports scores
Traffic
Weather
Weather map
Help
* If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports
schedules" or "Sports scores", you can
then say any of the commands in the
following chart.
Sports-Related Commands
Voice command
Baseball
College basketball
College football
Golf
MLS
My teams
NBA
NFL
NHL
WNBA
Help
Additional Sports-Related Voice
Commands
Voice command
Baseball headlines
Baseball schedule
Baseball scores
College basketball headlines
College basketball schedule
College basketball scores
College football headlines
College football schedule
College football scores
Golf headlines
Golf leaderboard
Golf schedule
400
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
MLS headlines
MLS schedule
MLS scores
Motor sports headlines
Motor sports order
Motor sports schedule
My team headlines
My teams schedule
My teams scores
NBA headlines
NBA schedule
NBA scores
NFL headlines
NFL schedule
NFL scores
NHL headlines
NHL schedule
NHL scores
WNBA headlines
WNBA schedule
WNBA scores
Help
Alerts
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any
of the following services:
Action and DescriptionMessage
The complete messageView
The messageDelete
MessagesDelete All
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time, which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
401
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in
a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts
where fitted or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 32). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 175).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I (Information)
button to access these features. If your
vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab. Then
select:
Message
Apps
Emergency Assistance
On
E142607
You can also access 911 Assist by
pressing the Setting icon and then
selecting:
Message
Settings
Phone
Emergency Assistance
You can also select:
Help
Emergency Assistance
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
402
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone to SYNC.
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the United States,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to
contact emergency services if 911 Assist
triggers. If a connected phone sustains
damage or loses connection to SYNC,
SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
to, any available previously paired phone
and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
SYNC provides a short window of time
(approximately 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call,
SYNC attempts to dial 911.
SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If:
Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown
from the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
403
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicles overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
Vehicle diagnostic information.
Scheduled maintenance.
Open recalls and Field Service Actions.
Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
Making a Report
E142608
If you want to run a report by using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Apps
Vehicle Health Report
E142599
You can also run a vehicle health
report by voice command.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Vehicle Health Report
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
404
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Where Am I?
For information about your current
location, select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Message
View your vehicle's
current location, if
your vehicle is
equipped with
navigation. If your
vehicle is not
equipped with
navigation, nothing
displays.
Where Am I?
NAVIGATION
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see an authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the Dest button
when it appears. See Setting a
Destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your
vehicle's current location, touch the green
bar in the upper right-hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See
Map mode later in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen,
then the Dest button when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
Destination
Message
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
1. Enter the necessary information into
the highlighted text fields (in any
order). For address destination entry,
the Go! button appears once you enter
all the necessary information. Pressing
the Go! button makes the address
location appear on the map. If you
choose Previous Destination, the last
20 destinations you have selected
appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to set
this as a waypoint (have the system
route to this point on the way to your
current destination) or save it as a
favorite. The system considers any
Avoid Areas selections in its route
calculation.
405
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
3. Choose from up to three different types
of routes, and then select Start Route.
Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
possible.
Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient
route.
You can cancel the route or have the
system demo the route for you. Select
Route Prefs to set route preferences like
avoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries and
car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes.
(High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes.
People who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Route option and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the
talking bubble icon that appears in the
upper right navigation corner (green bar)
if you want the system to repeat route
guidance information. When the system
repeats the last guidance instruction, it
updates the distance to the next guidance
instruction, since it detects when the
vehicle is moving.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Main categories
Message
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Message
Health & Medicine
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
Subcategories
Message
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in
Canada and 11 in Mexico).
406
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address and phone number. If cityseekr
lists the point of interest, more information
is available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
hours.
Press More Information for a longer
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price as well as the
website. This screen displays the point of
interest icon such as:
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing more
information for hotels, cityseekr also
tells you if the hotel has certain
services and facilities using icons, such
as:
Subcategories
Message
Restaurant
Business center
Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator
24 hour room service
Fitness center
Internet access
Pool
Wi-fi
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address.
407
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into
account when planning your route.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation.
Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs
Display your vehicles previously traveled
route with white dots. Switch this feature
ON or OFF.
Turn List Format
Have the system display your turn list Top
to Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Parking POI Notification
Set the automatic parking point of interest
notification. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
When parking point of interest notification
is on, the icons display on the map when
you get close to your destination. This may
not be very useful in dense areas, and may
clutter the map when other points of
interest display.
Route Preferences
Preferred Route
Choose to have the system display the
Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route
first. If you set Always Use Preferred
Route to Yes, the system uses the
selected route type to calculate only one
route to the desired destination.
Always Use Preferred Route
Bypass route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates
one route based on preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty
Select a low, medium or high cost for the
calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Avoid
These features allow you to choose to
have the system avoid freeways, toll roads,
ferries and car trains when planning your
route. Switch these features ON or OFF.
Use HOV Lanes
Have the system use high-occupancy
vehicle lanes, if available, when planning
your route.
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts
Have the system use Voice & Tones or
Tone Only on your programmed route.
Auto - Fill State/Province
Have the system automatically fill in the
state and province based on the
information already entered into the
system. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
Traffic Preferences
Avoid Traffic Problems
Choose how you want the system to
handle traffic problems along your route.
Automatic: Have the system reroute
you to avoid traffic incidents that
develop and impact the current route.
The system does not provide a traffic
alert notification.
Manual: Have the system always
provide a traffic alert notification for
traffic incidents along the planned
route. You have a choice to accept or
ignore the notification before making
the route deviation.
408
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Traffic Alert Notification
Have the system display traffic alert
notifications.
Other traffic alert features allows you to
turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the
map such as road work, incident, accidents
and closed roads. Scroll down to view all
the different types of alerts. Switch these
features ON or OFF.
Avoid Areas
Choose areas which you want the system
to avoid when calculating a route for you.
Press Add to program an entry. Once you
make a selection, the system tries to avoid
the area(s) if possible for all routes. To
delete a selection, choose the listing on
the screen. When the screen changes to
Avoid Areas Edit, you can press Delete
at the bottom right of the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also contain
features, such as town blocks, building
footprints and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies and improves with
updated map releases.
E174016
Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It
toggles between three different map
modes: Heading up, North up and 3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The
system remembers this setting for larger
map scales, but shows the map in North
up only. If the scale returns below this level,
the system restores Heading up.
E142643
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted
and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
View switches between full map, street
list and exit view in route guidance.
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows
direct access to navigation settings,
View/Edit Route, SIRIUS Travel Link,
Guidance Mute and Cancel Route.
409
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
E174017
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance.
When the light on the button
illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker
button appears on the map only when
route guidance is active.
E146188
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicles
current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch off the feature, just press the +
or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and
displays the distance and time to your
destination. If the button is pressed, a pop
up appears with the destination listed (and
waypoint if applicable) along with mileage
and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time
to reach your destination or your estimated
arrival time.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll
the map; the fixed icon is in the
center of the screen. The map
position closest to the cursor is in
a window on the top center part of the
screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry.
This is the default symbol shown
after the entry has been stored to the
Address Book by any method other than
the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon
more than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save
one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot
change this icon.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point of
interest categories you choose to
display on the map. You can
choose to display three point of interest
categories on the map at one time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location
of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different
for each waypoint and represents
the position of the waypoint in the route
list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on the
planned route.
410
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:
Set as Dest
Touch this button to select a scrolled
location on the map as your destination.
You may scroll the map by pressing your
index finger on the map display. When you
reach the desired location, simply let go
and then touch Set as Dest.
Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to set the current
location as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites
Touch this button to save the current
location to your favorites.
POI Icons
Touch this button to select icons to display
on the map. You can select up to three
icons to display on the map at the same
time. Turn these ON or OFF.
Cancel Route
Touch this button to cancel the active
route.
View/Edit Route When a Route is
Active
Subcategories
Message
View Route
Edit Destination/Waypoints
Edit Turn List
Detour
Edit Route Preferences
Edit Traffic Preferences
Cancel Route
Nokia is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
Nokia by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Nokia
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-4NAVTEQ
(1-866-462-8837) or going to
www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle
to determine if there is an update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. After the tone,
say any of the following commands:
411
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Navigation system voice commands
Voice command
1
Cancel next waypoint
1
Cancel route
2
Destination
Destination <nametag>
Destination <POI category>
Destination favorites
Destination home
Destination intersection
Destination nearest <POI category>
Destination nearest POI
Destination play nametags
Destination POI
Destination POI category
Destination previous destination
Destination street address
1
Detour
3
Navigation
Navigation voice volume decrease
Navigation voice volume increase
1
Repeat instruction
Show 3D
Show heading up
Show map
Show north up
Voice command
1
Show route
1
Show turn list
Voice guidance off
Voice guidance on
Where am I?
Zoom in
Zoom out
Help
1 These commands are only available when
a navigation route is active.
2 If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the following
"Destination" chart.
3 If you say "Navigation", you can then say
any command in the following
"Navigation" chart.
Destination
Voice command
<nametag>
<POI category>
Favorites
Home
Intersection
Nearest <POI category>
Nearest POI
Play nametags
POI category
412
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
Voice command
Previous destination
Street address
Help
Navigation
Voice command
*
Destination
Zoom city
Zoom country
Zoom minimum
Zoom maximum
Zoom province
Zoom state
Zoom street
Zoom to <distance>
Help
* If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the "Destination" chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either "Navigation
destination street address" or "Destination
street address", the system asks you to say
the full address. The system displays an
example on-screen. You can then speak
the address naturally, such as "One two
three four Main Street, Anytown".
413
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
MyFord Touch
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, contact
an authorized dealer or visit our online
store at www.accessories.ford.com
(United States only).
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Genuine Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories. Ford Motor
Company will warrant your accessory
through the warranty that provides the
greatest benefit:
24 months, unlimited miles
The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
Side window deflectors
Splash guards
Wheels
Interior Style
All-weather floor mats
Interior ambient lighting
Cargo organizers
Rear seat entertainment*
Premium carpeted floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup and smokers packages
Roof racks and carriers*
Hitch and towing accessories
Peace of Mind
Remote start
Vehicle security system
Wheel locks
Bumper-mounted parking sensor*
Keyless entry keypad
*The Ford Licensed Accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
414
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Accessories
Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly
designed for automotive use.
If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability,
and may adversely affect the
performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
The auxiliary switchboard on the center
console makes aftermarket customization
easier, with four prewired switches
attached to the power distribution box for
electrical accessories.
E163431
The switches only operate while the
ignition is in the on position, whether the
engine is running or not. It is, however,
recommended that the engine remain
running to maintain a battery charge when
using the switches for an extended
duration or higher current draws. When you
switch them on they provide 20 amps of
electrical battery power for a variety of
uses.
A fuse and relay kit is included with this
option. The kit contains the required fuses
and relays that are included under the
driver seat in the pre-fusebox. Refer to the
instructions included with the kit. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There will also be one power lead for each
switch found in a four way connector
located under the driver seat.
The relays are coded as follows:
FuseWire colorCircuit numberSwitch
20AYellowCAC05AUX 1
20AGreen with brown
trace
CAC06AUX 2
20AViolet with green
trace
CAC07AUX 3
20ABrownCAC08AUX 4
415
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Accessories
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
416
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.
417
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.
418
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
419
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
420
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
421
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (Agreement) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (Telenav) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively Telenav Software).
All references herein to you and your
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenavs privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
422
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the Telenav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Telenav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenavs or its suppliers
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)
use the Telenav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav
Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
Telenav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the Telenav Software for critical navigation
in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are
not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
423
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAVS
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
424
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, Notices)
electronically. Telenav may provide such
Notices by posting them on Telenavs
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenavs or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that partys right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words include and including, and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
without limitation.
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
425
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenavs third
party vendor licensors:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (Data) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (Telenav) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (Data) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (NAV2) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with
the Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
in any form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
426
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you as is, and
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
427
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert Netherlands where European
HERE Data is used], without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert The Netherlands
where European HERE Data is used] for
any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
commercial item as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (FAR) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following Notice of Use, and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 2014 HERE All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.
©United States Postal Servic
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
428
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (Third Party
Data), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (Her Majesty),
Canada Post Corporation (Canada
Post) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (NRCan):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an as is basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (Her Majesty), Canada
Post Corporation (Canada Post)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (NRCan). Such
data is licensed on an as is basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
429
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (INEGI):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011
Ecuador
source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®
Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
430
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Clients license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HEREs database for the country of
Jordan (Jordan Data) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, Enterprise Applica-
tions shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de lEquipement et des
Transports.
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Clients
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (OS) to create and
sell paper maps, Clients paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Clients complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
431
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Clients obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Clients
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (OS) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging
relating thereto shall include the
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below
corresponding to the Territory (or
portion thereof) included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen
Austria
© EuroGeographics
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
source: © IGN 2009 BD
TOPO ®
France
Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung der
zuständigen Behörden
entnommen
Germany
Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright and
database right 2010 Contains
Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database right
2010
Great
Britain
Copyright Geomatics Ltd.Greece
Copyright © 2003; Top-Map
Ltd.
Hungary
La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando quale
riferimento anche cartografia
numerica ed al tratto
prodotta e fornita dalla
Regione Toscana.
Italy
Copyright © 2000; Norwe-
gian Mapping Authority
Norway
Source: IgeoE PortugalPortugal
Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG
Spain
432
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Based upon electronic data
© National Land Survey
Sweden.
Sweden
Topografische Grundlage: ©
Bundesamt für Landestopo-
graphie.
Switzer-
land
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Clients compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
433
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
434
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the Peoples
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
435
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
436
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
Vehicle with SYNC only
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with
Touchscreen/My Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
437
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Appendices
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill the cost of parts and
labor can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss whats not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
438
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicles maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
Windshield wiper blades.
Spark plugs.
The clutch disc.
Brake pads and linings.
Shock absorbers.
Struts.
Engine Belts.
Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada and the United States, provided
by a network of participating authorized
Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
439
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the correct
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep the cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
12-month or 12000 mi (20,000 km) parts
and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to crash repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the correct performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Vehicles with a 3.2L, 3.5L or 3.7L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the correct oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 mi (16,000 km).
440
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Changing the Engine Oil
and Oil Filter (page 205).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.
All Vehicles
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to correctly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicles normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicles oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and
correct pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
441
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstruc-
tions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant
strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if
necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for
correct operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for correct operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear
and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag
and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean
or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running
correctly, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly.
This can help identify potential issues and
prevent major problems. We recommend
having the following multi-point inspection
performed at every scheduled
maintenance interval to help make sure
your vehicle keeps running correctly.
Multi-point inspection
Accessory drive belt(s).
Battery performance.
Engine air filter.
Exhaust system.
Multi-point inspection
Exterior lamps and hazard warning
system operation.
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary.
For oil and fluid leaks.
Horn operation.
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses.
Suspension component for leaks or
damage.
Steering and linkage.
Tires (including spare) for wear and
correct pressure** .
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits.
Washer spray and wiper operation.
* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir,
automatic transmission, power steering (if
equipped with hydraulic power assist
steering) and window washer.
**If your vehicle is equipped with a
temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the
canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
442
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
(Vehicles with a 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L
Engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to expect the oil change message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving.
No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing.
Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling.
Extended hot or cold operation.
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing.
Extreme hot or cold operation.
443
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*
Change engine oil and filter.**
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Diesel engine fill diesel exhaust fluid.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
* Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Other maintenance items 1
Torque rear axle U-bolts to specification.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km) Diesel engine replace fuel filter. 2
Replace engine air filter.
Change diesel foam air filter.Every 45000 miles (70000
km)
Change engine coolant. 3
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
444
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items 1
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 4
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km) Change rear axle fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2Replace early if indicated by per Water In Fuel warning lamp. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 74).
3 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
4 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the oil
change required message appearing in the
information display.
Example 1: The message appears at
28750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
Example 2: The message does not
appear, but the odometer reads
30000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,
the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was
reset at 25000 mi (40,000 km)).
Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled
Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently,
service as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
445
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled
Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.*
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints, Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.*
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
446
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change interval
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear
axles and power take-off units with
synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks
equipped with Ford-design axles are
lubricated for life; do not check or change
fluid unless a leak is suspected, service is
required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods
of trailer towing with outside temperatures
above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open
throttle for long periods above 45 mph
(72 km/h), change non-synthetic rear axle
fluid every 3000 mi (4,800 km) or three
months, whichever comes first. This
interval can be waived if the axle is filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting
Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A; GL-5
or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3
EST-M2C118-A or equivalent for complete
refill of Traction-Lok rear axles. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Police, Taxi and Livery vehicle axle
maintenance: Change rear axle fluid every
100000 mi (160,000 km). Rear axle fluid
change may be waived if the axle was filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting
Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A; GL-5
or equivalent. Add four ounces (118
milliliters) of additive friction modifier XL-3
EST-M2C118-A, or equivalent, for complete
refill of Traction-Lok rear axles. Change
the axle fluid anytime the axle submerges
in water.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5000 mi (8,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine air filter replacement: The life of
the engine air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
447
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
448
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
449
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
450
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
451
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
452
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
453
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
454
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................88
About This Manual...........................................7
Protecting the Environment................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................136
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................136
Accessories.....................................................414
Exterior Style........................................................414
Interior Style.........................................................414
Lifestyle..................................................................414
Peace of Mind......................................................414
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................10
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................215
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................216
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................215
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................60
Airbag Disposal...............................................42
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................88
Air Vents............................................................88
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................59
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................59
Alarm System........................................................59
Arming the Alarm.................................................59
Disarming the Alarm...........................................59
Triggering the Alarm............................................59
Appendices.....................................................416
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............76
Airbag Secondary Warning...............................76
Door Ajar...................................................................77
Exterior Lamps On................................................77
Gearshift Lever not in Park (P)........................77
Key in Ignition..........................................................77
Parking Brake On...................................................77
Safety Belt Minder................................................77
Audio Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display...................................61
Audio Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display.................................60
Seek, Next or Previous.........................................61
Audio Input Jack...........................................297
Audio System................................................282
General Information.........................................282
Audio Troubleshooting..............................299
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................290
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC.............................................................288
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/
FM...................................................................283
AUX Button..........................................................286
Clock Button........................................................285
Menu Button.......................................................286
Sound Button.....................................................286
Station Preset Buttons....................................286
Station Tuning Buttons...................................285
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD.................................................286
Autolamps........................................................66
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................66
Automatic Transmission............................132
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................134
Hints on Driving with an Automatic
Transmission...................................................134
Understanding the Gearshift Lever
Positions of the Automatic
Transmission....................................................132
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................209
Autowipers.......................................................63
Auxiliary Power Points.................................101
AC Power Point....................................................101
Auxiliary Power Point Locations....................101
Auxiliary Switches........................................415
B
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood.........200
Booster Seats..................................................22
Types of Booster Seats......................................22
Bottle Holder..................................................103
Brake Fluid Check.........................................210
Brakes...............................................................136
General Information..........................................136
Breaking-In......................................................172
Bulb Specification Chart............................221
455
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
C
California Proposition 65.............................10
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel.................................278
Capacities.............................................................278
Specifications......................................................279
Capacities and Specifications -
3.5L..................................................................271
Capacities..............................................................271
Specifications......................................................272
Capacities and Specifications -
3.7L..................................................................274
Capacities.............................................................274
Specifications......................................................276
Capacities and Specifications................265
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................227
Catalytic Converter.......................................114
Driving with a Catalytic Converter.................114
Changing a Bulb............................................217
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp............220
Front Clearance Lamp......................................219
Headlamp..............................................................217
Interior Lamp.......................................................220
License Plate Lamp..........................................220
Reading Lamps....................................................221
Rear Lamps...........................................................219
Side Direction Indicator....................................219
Sun Visor Mirror Lamp.......................................221
Changing a Fuse...........................................198
Changing a Road Wheel...........................256
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................256
Front Jacking Points...........................................261
Installing a Road Wheel..................................262
Locking Lug Nuts................................................257
Rear Jacking Points............................................261
Removing a Road Wheel................................262
Stowing the Wheel and Vehicle Jack.........263
Vehicle Jack.........................................................260
Vehicles With a Spare Wheel........................257
Changing the 12V Battery..........................213
Installing the Battery.........................................214
Removing the Battery.......................................213
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel.................................225
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
3.5L.................................................................223
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
3.7L.................................................................224
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil
Filter...............................................................205
Engine Lubrication for Severe Service
Operation........................................................205
Changing the Wiper Blades......................215
Changing the Windshield Wiper
Blades................................................................215
Checking MyKey System Status..............49
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................215
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance..................................................31
Child Safety.......................................................13
General Information.............................................13
Child Safety Locks..........................................25
Left-Hand Side......................................................25
Right-Hand Side...................................................25
Child Seat Positioning..................................24
Cigar Lighter...................................................102
Cleaning Products........................................227
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................230
Cleaning the Engine....................................228
Cleaning the Exterior...................................227
Body Paintwork Preservation........................227
Cleaning the Chrome Trim..............................227
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................227
Cleaning the Rear Window.............................227
Sliding Door Tracks...........................................228
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................229
Cleaning the Interior...................................229
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens
and Radio Screens.......................................229
Rear Windows.....................................................229
Safety Belts..........................................................229
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................229
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................48
Climate Control..............................................88
Principle of Operation........................................88
Cold Weather Precautions.........................173
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check...........................206
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
456
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Creating a MyKey............................................47
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................47
Cruise Control..................................................62
Principle of Operation.......................................146
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................146
Cup Holders....................................................103
Customer Assistance.................................180
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................67
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)........................................67
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................67
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................106
Regeneration........................................................107
Digital Radio..................................................292
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................293
Direction Indicators.......................................68
DPF
See: Diesel Particulate Filter..........................106
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........210
Changing the Fuel Filter....................................211
Purging Air From the Fuel System................212
Driver Alert......................................................148
Principle of Operation.......................................148
Using Driver Alert................................................148
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................33
Children and Airbags..........................................38
Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........33
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................38
Driving Aids.....................................................148
Driving Hints....................................................172
Driving Through Water................................173
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................67
E
Economical Driving.......................................172
Emission Control System...........................122
Diesel Exhaust System: Oxidation Catalyst
And Diesel Particulate Filter System
..............................................................................124
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance...........131
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................122
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................123
Tampering With a Noise Control
System................................................................131
End User License Agreement..................416
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)...............................................................416
Engine Block Heater....................................107
Using the Engine Block Heater.....................108
Engine Coolant Check...............................206
Adding Engine Coolant...................................206
Checking the Engine Coolant.......................206
Recycled Engine Coolant................................207
Severe Climates.................................................208
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................208
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................58
Engine Oil Check..........................................204
Adding Engine Oil..............................................205
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel............................................................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L.........................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L..........................204
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel..............................................266
Drivebelt Routing...............................................266
Engine Specifications - 3.5L....................265
Drivebelt Routing...............................................265
Engine Specifications - 3.7L....................265
Drivebelt Routing...............................................266
Entertainment..............................................369
A/V Inputs............................................................386
AM/FM Radio........................................................371
Bluetooth Audio.................................................386
Browsing Device Content...............................369
SD Card Slot and USB Port............................381
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).........................................................377
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................386
457
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Essential Towing Checks...........................163
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................168
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Water Craft (PWC).......................................169
Safety Chains.......................................................164
Tow Hitch...............................................................164
Trailer Brakes........................................................164
Trailer Lamps.......................................................168
Trailer Towing Connector.................................163
When Towing a Trailer......................................168
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options...................................11
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................438
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............439
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only).........................438
Exterior Mirrors................................................70
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................70
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................70
F
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27
Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................29
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................28
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........27
Floor Mats........................................................173
Ford Credit.........................................................10
(U.S. Only)...............................................................10
Fuel and Refueling.......................................109
Fuel Consumption.......................................120
Calculating Fuel Economy................................121
Filling the Tank......................................................121
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................113
Fuel Filter - Gasoline....................................212
Fuel Quality - Diesel......................................111
Biodiesel..................................................................112
Diesel Fuel Additives .........................................113
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not
Required .............................................................111
Fuel Requirements - Choosing the Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is Required
(United States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands and Other Locales).............111
Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................110
Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel
Vehicle (If Equipped)....................................110
Choosing the Right Fuel Without a Flex Fuel
Vehicle (If Equipped)....................................110
Octane Recommendations.............................110
Fuel Shutoff....................................................176
Fuse Box Locations.....................................186
Body Control Module Fuse Box....................186
Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................186
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............186
Pre-fuse Box.........................................................186
Fuses.................................................................186
Fuse Specification Chart............................187
Body Control Module.........................................197
Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................187
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........191
Pre-fuse Box.........................................................194
G
Gauges................................................................72
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............72
Fuel Gauge..............................................................73
Information Display..............................................72
Tripmeter Reset and Distance to
Empty...................................................................73
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................43
General Maintenance Information.......440
Multi-point Inspection.....................................442
Owner Checks and Services...........................441
Protecting Your Investment..........................440
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................440
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?....................................................440
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................183
Getting the Services You Need...............180
Away From Home..............................................180
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................137
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................176
458
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Head Restraints..............................................93
Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................94
Installing the Head Restraint ..........................94
Removing the Head Restraint.........................94
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................92
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................92
Heated Rear Window..........................................92
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................88
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................90
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................90
General Hints........................................................90
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................90
Maximum Cooling Performance in
Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel
and Footwell Positions..................................91
Recommended Settings for Cooling ...........90
Recommended Settings for Heating...........90
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather...............................................................91
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods
During Extreme High Ambient
Temperatures...................................................90
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................136
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood.........200
I
Ignition Switch..............................................104
In California (U.S. Only)..............................181
Information Display Control.......................62
Information Displays.....................................78
General Information............................................78
Information....................................................395
911 Assist...............................................................401
Alerts.......................................................................401
Calendar................................................................401
Sirius Travel Link................................................399
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only).................................................................396
Vehicle Health Report.....................................403
Information Messages.................................83
Installing Child Seats.....................................14
Child Seats...............................................................14
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................15
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)..............................................17
Using Tether Straps..............................................19
Instrument Cluster.........................................72
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................67
Interior Lamps.................................................68
Courtesy Lamp.....................................................68
Reading Lamps.....................................................68
Interior Mirror...................................................70
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................70
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................177
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................178
Jump Starting.......................................................178
Preparing Your Vehicle.......................................177
Removing the Jumper Cables........................178
K
Keys and Remote Controls.........................43
Principle of Operation........................................43
L
Lane Keeping System.................................149
Lane Keeping Alert.............................................149
Lighting Control..............................................65
Headlamp Flasher...............................................66
High Beams............................................................65
Lighting Control Positions................................65
Parking Lamps......................................................66
Lighting..............................................................65
General Information............................................65
Load Carrying.................................................152
Load Limit........................................................152
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................159
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................152
Load Retaining Fixtures..............................152
Securing Cargo.....................................................152
459
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Locking and Unlocking.................................53
Automatic Locking..............................................56
Automatic Unlocking..........................................56
Configurable Unlocking......................................57
Locking.....................................................................53
Locking and Unlocking Confirmation...........53
Locking and Unlocking the Doors From
Inside....................................................................53
One-Stage Unlocking.........................................56
Opening and Closing the Double Rear
Doors....................................................................54
Opening and Closing the Sliding Door.........54
Rear Emergency Exit...........................................56
Two-Stage Unlocking.........................................57
Unlocking.................................................................53
Zone Re-Locking...................................................57
Locks...................................................................53
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................256
Lug Nuts..........................................................264
M
Maintenance.................................................200
General Information.........................................200
Manual Climate Control..............................89
Manual Seats..................................................94
Adjusting the Armrest........................................96
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.......................95
Moving the Seat Backward or
Forward...............................................................94
Recline Adjustment.............................................95
Media Hub......................................................298
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................78
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................92
See: Windows and Mirrors................................69
Mobile Communications Equipment........11
Motorcraft Parts - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel............................................................269
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L...............................267
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L..............................268
MyFord Touch...........................................348
General Information.........................................348
MyKey Troubleshooting................................51
MyKey.............................................................46
Principle of Operation........................................46
N
Navigation......................................................405
cityseekr...............................................................406
Map Mode............................................................409
Navigation Map Updates..................................411
Navigation Voice Commands.........................411
Point of Interest (POI) Categories..............406
Quick-touch Buttons..........................................411
Setting a Destination.......................................405
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences....................................................408
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........443
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® (Vehicles with
a 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engine)....................443
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................444
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................206
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System.............................................................206
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................204
Opening and Closing the Hood.............200
Closing the Hood................................................201
Opening the Hood............................................200
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................184
Obtaining a French Owners Manual..........184
Overhead Console.......................................103
Overhead Storage Compartments..............103
P
Parking Aid......................................................142
Switching the Parking Aid System
Off........................................................................143
Parking Aids....................................................142
Principle of Operation.......................................142
Parking Brake..................................................137
Center Parking Brake.........................................137
Passive Anti-Theft System........................58
SecuriLock®...........................................................58
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................58
Perchlorate........................................................10
460
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Personalized Settings...................................82
Measure Units........................................................82
Switching Chimes Off or On............................82
Phone..............................................................388
Making Calls........................................................390
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................389
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................389
Phone Menu Options........................................391
Phone Settings...................................................393
Phone Voice Commands................................394
Receiving Calls...................................................390
Text Messaging...................................................392
Post-Crash Alert System...........................179
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................53
Power Seats.....................................................96
Power Lumbar.......................................................97
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................210
Adding Power Steering Fluid..........................210
Power Windows.............................................69
Accessory Delay...................................................69
Bounce-Back.........................................................69
Driver Side One-Touch Down..........................69
Driver Side One-Touch Up................................69
R
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............91
Rear Quarter Windows..................................71
Closing the Rear Windows.................................71
Opening the Rear Windows...............................71
Rear Seats.........................................................97
Installing the Seats.............................................99
Recline Adjustment............................................98
Removing Seats, 12 & 15 Passenger
Vehicles..............................................................98
Rear View Camera........................................143
Switching the Rear View Camera Off.........145
Switching the Rear View Camera On..........144
Using the Display................................................144
Vehicles with Parking Aid................................145
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................143
Recommended Towing Weights.............161
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle...............................163
Reduced Engine Performance.................172
Refueling...........................................................118
Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System................120
Remote Control..............................................43
Car Finder................................................................44
Integrated Key head Transmitter....................43
Programming a New Remote Control.........44
Replacing the Battery.........................................44
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................45
Removing a Headlamp...............................216
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............230
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................10
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts......................11
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................45
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................185
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................184
Roadside Assistance...................................175
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.........................................................175
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.........................................................175
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................175
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................175
Roadside Emergencies...............................175
Running-In
See: Breaking-In...................................................172
Running Out of Fuel......................................113
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................113
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................113
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29
Safety Belt Minder.........................................30
Belt-Minder®.........................................................30
Safety Belts......................................................26
Principle of Operation........................................26
461
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................29
Conditions of operation.....................................30
Safety Canopy............................................40
Safety Precautions......................................109
Satellite Radio..............................................294
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................295
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............295
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................295
Troubleshooting.................................................296
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........448
Scheduled Maintenance..........................440
Seats...................................................................93
Security..............................................................58
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System............................................................115
Approximate Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Usage...................................................................117
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or
Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction
System.................................................................117
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines.....................117
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level................................115
Settings...........................................................356
Clock.......................................................................357
Display....................................................................357
Settings..................................................................361
Sound.....................................................................359
Vehicle...................................................................359
Side Airbags.....................................................39
Sitting in the Correct Position...................93
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................251
Special Notices.................................................11
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................445
3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines............................445
Exceptions............................................................447
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................146
Speed Limiter................................................148
Engine Speed Limiter........................................148
Vehicle Speed Limiter - Fixed........................148
Stability Control............................................140
Principle of Operation......................................140
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................104
Starting a Diesel Engine............................105
Cold Weather Operation.................................106
Engine Glow Plugs.............................................105
Failure to Start....................................................106
Starting a Cold or Hot Engine........................106
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................104
Before starting the engine check the
following:..........................................................104
Cold or Hot Engine.............................................105
Engine Idle Speed after Starting..................105
Flooded Engine...................................................105
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........104
General Information..........................................104
Steering Wheel...............................................60
Storage Compartments.............................103
Supplementary Restraints System.........32
Principle of Operation.........................................32
Switching Off the Engine...........................107
Vehicles With a Turbocharger........................107
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC Applications and Services.......318
911 Assist................................................................318
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................325
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &
Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United
States Only)....................................................322
Vehicle Health Report......................................320
SYNC...........................................................300
General Information........................................300
SYNC Troubleshooting.........................339
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............265
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................182
462
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Tire Care..........................................................234
Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................235
Inflating the Tires...............................................243
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grades...............................................................234
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................236
Inspecting the Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems................................................................245
Location of the Tire Label...............................243
Tire Age.................................................................246
Tire and Wheel Alignment.............................249
Tire Damage........................................................246
Tire Pressure Monitoring System................248
Tire Replacement Requirements.................247
Tire Rotation........................................................249
Tire Safety Practices........................................248
Tire Wear...............................................................246
United States Department of
Transportation Tire Quality
Grades...............................................................234
Tire Pressure Monitoring System............251
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................252
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure........................................................254
Understanding the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................253
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................233
Towing a Trailer.............................................160
Load Placement.................................................160
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................170
Emergency Towing.............................................170
Recreational Vehicle Towing .........................170
Towing..............................................................160
Traction Control............................................138
Principle of Operation.......................................138
Trailer Sway Control.....................................161
Transmission Code Designation..............271
Transmission..................................................132
Transmission
See: Transmission...............................................132
Transporting the Vehicle...........................169
Trip Computer..................................................81
All Values..................................................................81
Average Fuel Consumption...............................81
Distance to Empty................................................81
Outside Air Temperature....................................81
Resetting the Trip Computer............................81
Trip Odometer.......................................................82
Trip Timer................................................................82
U
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel..............................................203
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................201
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L...................202
USB Port..........................................................297
Using Cruise Control...................................146
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................147
Switching Cruise Control On..........................146
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................50
Vehicles With Ford-Approved Aftermarket
Remote Start Systems.................................50
Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start
Systems..............................................................50
Using Snow Chains......................................251
Using Stability Control.................................141
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control
(RSC®)...............................................................141
Using SYNC With Your Media
Player............................................................329
Accessing Your Play Menu.............................334
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port...........................................................329
Media Menu Features.......................................333
Media Voice Commands..................................331
System Settings.................................................336
What's Playing?.................................................330
463
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index
Using SYNC With Your Phone...........304
Accessing Features Through the Phone
Menu...................................................................310
Accessing Your Phone Settings.....................314
Making a Call......................................................309
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................305
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................306
Phone Options during an Active Call........309
Receiving Calls...................................................309
System Settings..................................................316
Text Messaging....................................................312
Using Traction Control................................138
Using Voice Recognition...........................302
Initiating a Voice Session................................302
System Interaction and Feedback..............303
Using Winter Tires.......................................250
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).........................182
V
Vehicle Care....................................................227
Vehicle Certification Label.......................270
Vehicle Identification Number................270
Vehicle Storage..............................................231
Battery....................................................................232
Body.........................................................................231
Brakes.....................................................................232
Cooling system....................................................231
Engine......................................................................231
Fuel system...........................................................231
General...................................................................231
Miscellaneous.....................................................232
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................232
Tires.........................................................................232
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................88
Vents
See: Air Vents........................................................88
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............270
Voice Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display...................................61
MyFord Touch® Controls..................................62
Voice Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display...................................61
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................74
Anti-Lock Brake System.....................................74
Battery......................................................................74
Brake System.........................................................74
Diesel Warning Lamps........................................74
Direction Indicator................................................75
Door Ajar..................................................................75
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................75
Engine Warning Lamps......................................75
Front Airbag............................................................75
High Beam...............................................................75
Lane Departure......................................................75
Low Fuel Level.......................................................76
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................76
Message Center Warning..................................76
Oil Pressure.............................................................76
Park Lamp...............................................................76
Safety Belt Minder................................................76
Stability Control....................................................76
Transmission Tow/Haul.....................................76
Washer Fluid Check.....................................210
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................227
See: Wipers and Washers.................................63
Waxing.............................................................228
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................256
Wheels and Tires.........................................233
General Information..........................................233
Windows and Mirrors...................................69
Windshield Washers.....................................64
Windshield Wipers.........................................63
Intermittent Wipe.................................................63
Winter Tires
See: Using Winter Tires...................................250
Wipers and Washers.....................................63
464
Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing
Index

Navigation menu